JP6513065B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a front frame configured to cover a window that opens the gaming board with a transparent protective plate in the back and forth (for example, Patent Document 1).

  By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides in the front frame is reduced, and the decorative substrate housed in the left and right sides is also in the form of a band plate. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, and the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes like a band plate.

JP, 2016-192989, A (paragraph [0014], and Drawing 1)

  However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip-like decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure the area for drawing out the wiring to the light emission means from the light emission control means.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and the object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of securing a region in which a wire is drawn out from a light emission control means in a strip-shaped decorative substrate. It is to do.

The effective solution for achieving the above-mentioned objective is shown below .

(Solution 1)
It is a gaming machine which advances a game based on a lottery result by lottery means, wherein the gaming machine has a plurality of light-emitting means and a plurality of strip-shaped decorative substrates formed in a predetermined shape, the plurality of strip plates Among the decorative substrates in the shape of a strip, a specific decorative plate in the shape of a strip is provided with a light emission control means capable of performing light emission control to the light emitting means, and the specific one of the plurality of decorative strips The light emission control means provided on the specific band plate-like decoration substrate except the band plate-like decoration substrate is controlled to emit light by the light emission control means, and at least one of the light emission control means is The planar shape is formed into a substantially rectangular shape, and each side thereof is disposed so as not to be parallel along both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the specific band plate-like decorative substrate, and the light emission control means The particular strip-like package to be implemented Each side of the heat transfer portion formed in a substantially rectangular shape smaller than the shape of the light emission control means in the mounting area of the substrate is disposed parallel to each side of the light emission control means Part is soldered to the light emission control means to diffuse the heat generated by the light emission control means through the heat transfer part to the whole of the specific band plate-like decorative substrate and dissipate the heat, and the specific band plate A game machine characterized in that no electronic component is disposed between both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the decorative substrate.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring is drawn out from each side of the light emission control means on the strip-shaped decorative substrate.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of a pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position from the right front. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly of an outer frame, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and was seen from the front upper, and (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and seen from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled a handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer base unit in a saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in a saucer unit from the direction of movement of a production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation button unit and was seen from the front lower. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a rotational drive unit in the left view of a production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board | substrate in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, (c) is a central pressing operation section of the pressing operation section It is a front view of a plate unit when pressing. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit into every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the back sectional view which cut the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the front-back direction center of a delivery blade. (A) is a back sectional view which cut a dispensing device in the front-back direction center of a dispensing blade, when a ball extraction movable piece is an open state, (b) is a sectional view cut by the AA line in (a) . It is a rear view of the delivery apparatus for demonstrating the rotation position of a delivery blade. It is a rear view of the delivery apparatus for demonstrating ball clogging and ball fall prevention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of a pachinko machine which was cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows upper part in the perspective view which looked at a main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. in the ball | bowl tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 103 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball which overflowed from the ball | bowl tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in a main body frame upper part. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line of Fig.101 (a). It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 5th Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of the game area where the game ball in a game board distributes. It is a front view of the center role and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. It is side sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the table | surface production | presentation unit with the center part goods in the left-right direction center, and was seen from the right. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a table | surface rendering unit, and the reflective recessed part of a surface light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a front light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which made the lower front center decoration body light-emit in a lower movable presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which made the lower front center decoration base rise in the lower movable presentation unit and made the lower front center decoration body and the lower back center decoration body emit light. Lower lower central lift base, lower left side lift base and lower right side lift base in lower movable effect unit to raise lower front center decoration, lower back center decoration, lower left side decoration and lower right side decoration It is a front view of a game board shown in the state where it was made to go. It is a front view of a pachinko machine when the press operation part of the effect operation unit is at the raised position with the game board in the state of FIG. The four rotating decorations in the lower movable rendering unit, the left-side rotating decoration, the left sub-side rotating decoration, the right-side rotating decoration, and the right sub-side rotating decoration are expanded to schematically show the decoration of the decoration on each surface FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow by which light emission display is carried out in a lower movable presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. It is an explanatory view showing roughly the drive mechanism of the upper back movable presentation unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the upper front movable decoration of the upper front movable effect unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a periphery control unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is sectional drawing of the XX line of FIG. FIG. 135 is a view on arrow A of FIG. 134. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of a frame earthing | grounding board. It is a circuit diagram explaining an outline of a circuit composition of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which partially expanded the power supply board. FIG. 140 is a view on arrow B of FIG. 140. It is silk printing (the 1) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board. It is silk printing (the 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board. It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decoration board | substrate with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of a LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 147 is an enlarged view of a portion D in FIG. 147 as viewed from an LED non-mounting surface. It is a modification of a payment device. It is a circuit diagram explaining the outline of the modification of the circuit composition of a power supply board. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position from the right front is there. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 90) is inserted.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 Attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame upper member 30, the lower end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20; An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the main body The frame lower hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be able to open and close in a forward direction centering on the left side in a front view.

  In the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to partially cover the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-reversed and radiated forward to allow the player to hear a more deep bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained also by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2. Main frame upper hinge member 510 and lower main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 openably and closably, and a metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main frame base unit 500 And a payout base unit 550 for receiving the gaming balls B supplied from the island facilities of the gaming hall, and a payout base unit 550, and a ball launching device 540 for hitting the gaming balls B into the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5. It is attached to a payout unit 560 for paying out the received gaming ball B to the player, a substrate unit 620 having a power supply substrate 630 and a payout control substrate 633, and a main body frame base 501. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 includes outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the top and bottom of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so as to close the opened front side. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square in a front view, It is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a center of the game area 5a in front view The effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the rear side of the game display panel 1100 and the rear side of the effect display device 1600 A peripheral control unit 1500 is configured as that the transparent substrate box, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emission effects according to the game state.

  In the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails which are in contact with the gaming ball B and are installed in a predetermined gauge array, and a predetermined benefit for the player by receiving or passing the gaming ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006; Is equipped. The obstacle nail is implanted on the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  The player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, the second large winning opening 2006 etc. The player can enjoy the operation of hitting the handle 182 as accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state changed by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, or a table effect unit 2600, lower movable effect The player can be entertained by causing the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like to perform movable effects and light emission effects.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of a pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically.

  The outer frame 2 is, as shown in the figure, separated from the left and right and extending vertically, the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. Outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends, outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20, and upper surface of outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-reversed and emitted forward.

  The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 of the outer frame 2. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable to the front centering on the left side in a front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend in the vertical direction, and are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially rotatably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 has an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And the lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame left member 11 is a portion from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a which is recessed to the right in a flat shape in the rear side portion of the left side in the front-rear direction divided into three, and the right side from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a The bulging part 11b bulging toward the direction and the hollow part 11c which penetrates the bulging part 11b up and down are provided. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 11c.

  Moreover, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed to be symmetrical with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b at the left side of 12a is provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a of the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally and a flat upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat contact portion 13d which extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and brings the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hooking member 25 attached to a lower portion of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame right member 21 is provided with a recess 21a recessed leftwardly in a flat shape at the rear side of the right and left sides of the right and left sides from the front and back, and a left side from the side opposite to the recess 21a in the left side A bulging portion 21 b bulging in the direction, and a hollow portion 21 c penetrating the bulging portion 21 b up and down are provided. The outer frame right member 21 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the recessed portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 21c.

  Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side is formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side is formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the right side 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and further front side And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the lower surface of the right end of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout 30a of the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b And a flat contact portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state in which the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut the upper surface of the right end of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout 41a of the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are members to which an outer frame collar 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later is hooked. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically from the front side of the mounting portion 24a to a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21 And a flat plate-like locking piece portion 24b on which the outer frame collar 653 at the upper side is locked.

  The lower hooking member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left from a flat mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 The flat-plate shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame collar 653 is locked and the insertion through which the lower outer frame collar 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the left and right notches 30a.

  Moreover, the outer frame upper member 30 is provided with the attachment step part 30b in which the upper surface and front surface were recessed rather than the general surface in the left side edge part. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 spaced apart to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right, and extends in the left and right direction; A box-shaped front curtain member 42 which is disposed forward of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain member 42 And a box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extending forwardly open, and a ball biting prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41 a that are respectively recessed to the left and right center sides in a state of penetrating vertically at the centers of the left and right side surfaces in the front and rear direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutouts 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and is provided with a recess 41 b into which the lower portion of the rear curtain plate member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41 b extends in the left and right direction, and extends from the rear position of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recessed portion 41 b widens the volume of the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate formed by the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 as much as possible.

  The front curtain plate member 42 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height The entire rear side is open. The front curtain member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear curtain plate member 43 so as to cooperate with the rear curtain plate member 43 to be part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 The space 40a is formed. The front curtain member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front and back direction and extending in the left and right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The rear curtain plate member 43 has a length in the left-right direction extending slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape whose front is open. The rear curtain plate member 43 cooperates with the front curtain plate member 42 to form the inner curtain plate space 40 a which becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 by attaching the front curtain plate member 42 to the front. The rear curtain plate member 43 has a cylindrical connection cylindrical portion 43a which extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward and communicates with the inner curtain plate space 40a at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylindrical portion 43 a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear curtain plate 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylindrical portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction which is about 1/3 the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and a depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. Is also formed slightly short. In the connection cylindrical portion 43a, a plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In communication with the internal space of 620 a, an enclosure 624 is formed.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the gaming ball B is retained at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the gaming ball B is held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is for preventing that it is pinched.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is provided with a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 to be described later may be involved; A first discharge port 44b opened upward at the left end of the left end 44a, and a second discharge port 44c opened upward on the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a; An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the resting portion 44a, and an upper end projection projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and inclined to be positioned upward as the upper surface goes rearward And a unit 44e.

  The first discharge port 44 b is formed at a position that matches the discharge hole 60 d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open at the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the gaming ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, when the ball biting preventing mechanism 44 is inserted into a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire is inserted. The rising wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tool entry. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d, even if it is bent upward, it abuts on the forwardly projecting upper end projecting portion 44e provided on the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent action from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the gaming ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is blocked by 44d, the gaming ball B is easily retained on the placement portion 44a. Then, when the game ball B is staying on the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 can not be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is firstly discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The lower outer frame assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front and rear curtain plate members 42 and 43 at a distance to the left and right and the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front and rear direction and attached to the inside of the front curtain plate member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46; And a frame-like seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the pair of guide members 45. The guide member 45 is formed of a low friction material having low friction resistance, and the lower end of the main body frame 4 is made slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain inner space 40 a (the enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. In the port member 47, two cylinders are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonate and amplify the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (in the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (player's side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass.

  The seal member 48 is compressed between the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame and upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. Fig.21 (a) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2, and was seen from the front upper side, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11 a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30 b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 extends from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a to the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends horizontally from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extension 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending to the left and right center of the front extension 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion The plate-like horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from the end edge to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open from the left side to the front side of the front extension 51b And a flat plate-like end edge wall 51e which is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front and rear direction, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a left side extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally forward to the left and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the rear end of the lock main body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to abut on a portion of the edge wall 51e which extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the attachment hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion on the front side of the lock main body 52a in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view by rotating the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end moves leftward by the operation of the operation piece 52b, and the bearing groove 51c Can be completely through. Thereby, the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. And an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a; and a discharge hole 60d which has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through vertically through the horizontal portion 60a. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached at a left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and extends in a reverse U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The lower portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the state assembled to the outer frame 2, and a screw not shown Is fixed to the rear curtain member 43 by the Further, the rising portion 60 b is attached to a portion on the front side of the bulging portion 11 b in the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60 d matches the first discharge port 44 b of the anti-ball bite mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between 4 and 4 gradually narrows, it rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be more easily prevented from rolling backward than the main frame 4 by discharging the game balls B from the discharge holes 60 d. It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball B to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 22 is a surface view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a substantially the same size as the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 can be attached openably from the front side It is done. The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in the front view extends vertically, and the game board 5 which is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4 A glass unit 160 closing the gaming area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a crime prevention cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, A handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner, a pan unit 200 mounted to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and a front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the pan unit 200. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101 a which is formed in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in which the outer shape of the front view extends vertically, and the front right of the door frame base 101 Handle attachment member 102 attached below, speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and attached near the rear end right end in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the left side A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the rear handlebar relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104, and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handlebar relay board 106 from the rear side A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and a door A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the gaming balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 which can be operated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 can be inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing the game which is thrown into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31 (a) is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side in a front view in a hinge rotatable manner with respect to the main body frame 4 and closes the front of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular, flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle attachment member 102 attached to the front lower right of the door frame base 101 for attaching the handle unit 180. And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in a rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in the rear view in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 A door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the substrate 104 and a handle back relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, the door frame base 101 The back handle handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the back of the handlebar and covers the handle back handle relay board 106 from the back side, and is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 to cover the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-like door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 180 is in the front lower corner, the dish unit 200 is in the lower front of the door window 101a, the door frame left side unit 400 is in the front left outside of the door window 101a, and A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

  Further, the glass frame 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and the transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the door window 101a formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 101 vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101 a penetrating in the front and back direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the front right lower corner of the front view and is inclined such that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the front end and the insertion recess 101c in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth in the cylinder lock 130 The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b are penetrated back and forth in front view left side, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 And a ball feed opening 101e for facing the

  The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates the ball outlet 150d of the far cover unit 150 forward for the lower bowl ball A passing hole 101f, a ball passing hole 101g for the upper tray which penetrates forward and backward through the ball passage 150a of the far cover unit 150 so as to penetrate forward and backward adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view And a glass unit attachment portion 101h into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, which is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed at the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper plate) in a front view and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i has the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200 located forward and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101 j which passes through in the front and rear direction below the door window 101 a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101 b. A wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the plate unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101 j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 to be described later penetrates It is formed to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 102a, and a tubular A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c which project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a The outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a are provided.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102 b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. The three ridges 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state in which the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similar inclined state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. When the speaker duct 103 is in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 The player can be favorably guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker opening 211 b of the dish unit base 211.

  Moreover, the speaker duct 103 is equipped with the cable holder 103a which hold | maintains the connection cable 503 in the back surface of the downward direction of a cylindrical site | part. The cable holder 103 a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is the same as that of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle back relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle back relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay substrate 104 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle back relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. And FIG. 84) are connected.

  The outer shape of the door frame sub relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending right and left on the front view right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically is combined and extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left of the frame main relay board 104 in a rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 and the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc. and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay substrate 104 and the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 with the door frame base unit 100 assembled are The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the rear cover unit 150.

  The handle back relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting surface 101 b below the ball feeding opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle back relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. To relay the When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the handle back relay board 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered by the handle back relay board cover 108.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover · handle back relay board cover · cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the back handle handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a part extending in the reverse L shape up and down) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape whose front and left in front view are open. In the state assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 covering the rear side and the door frame sub relay board 105 are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle back relay board cover 108 is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the back side of the handle back relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is used. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and an opening for passing the wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction of the lower surface.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is connected to the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending up and down, which are disposed apart from each other on the left and right, and the left and the right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 which has been extended, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 which is attached at the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 to the left and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of vertically spaced apart mountings on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked And the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes which are vertically separated and penetrated in the front-rear direction. In these insertion holes, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame wedge 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the width of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 in the vertical direction. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched in a square shape from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end. The notch portion 114 a is formed at a position at which the upper plate ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b coincide with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is disposed to be separated from each other in the left and right direction, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending in the vertical direction in front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending flatly forward from the side and a flat plate-like front piece portion connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extending portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the site of the insertion hole penetrating in the front and rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are stamped and formed of a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is , And assembled so as to be located below the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the ball passing opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101 and the through hole 101j. The cylinder attachment frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101 c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Door frame and hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 mounted movably in the vertical direction on the hinge bracket 121, and a hook attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a square shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the attachment piece 121a is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The wedge member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of projecting pieces 121 b of the door frame upper hinge pin 122. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the wedge member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124 via the wedge member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121 b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121 b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it down. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in a front view is rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 extending in the vertical direction is coaxial with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square-shaped flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The mounting piece 125 a and the protruding piece 125 b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125 b when assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is attached.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinged rotatably with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the body frame lower hinge member. Can.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking with The cylinder lock 130 is attached to a cylindrical cylinder main body 131 extending in the front and rear direction, a key hole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 And a rotation transmitting member 133 which rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter becomes larger toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of cutouts to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 for rotation.

  The cylinder lock 130 is in a state where the front end of the cylinder main body 131 substantially matches the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the pan unit main body 252 in the pan unit 200 when assembled in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 22 etc.).

3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to the ball emitting device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game stored in the upper plate 201 The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by the operation of the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a which is supplied with gaming balls B from the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. And the rear end of the front cover 141 are closed and the front is opened in a box shape, and the game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front and rear direction A front cover pivotally supported on a rear cover 142 having a striking ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and an axis extending between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 in the front-rear direction. The ball extraction member 143 having a partition 143a that divides the entrance 141a from the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game ball B on the partition 143a of the ball extraction 143 one back cover 14 The ball feeding member 144 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. And a ball feed solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144 A ball feed solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feed member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. From 141c, an operating rod 143c of a ball pullout member 143 described later extends forward. Also, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed and guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper ball. And it is formed so that the site | part currently open | released to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from a back side.

  The ball extraction member 143 divides the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b below the inlet 141a, and has a partition 143a whose upper surface is lowered in the direction of the ball feeding member 144; Around an axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and being bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b from near the middle in the vertical direction and the lower end extends in the front and rear direction , A rod-like operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a lower part of the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 143c moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extraction button 222 of the disc unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 is directed to the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-like plan view centering on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and the back of the blocking portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b which is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 144c which extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° centered on the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one gaming ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis by moving the collar portion 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 144 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 144b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 142a at the same time as the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b has a partition portion 143a. It is pivoted between the directionally oriented holding position. When the ball feed member 144 is at the supply position, the gaming ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540 and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the game ball B remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b is directed to the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b is closed at the ball feeding port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding movement rod 146 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 147 for pivoting the ball feeding member 144 around the vertically extending axis.

  The ball feed operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable about an axially extending axis. It is done. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feed around the right end The left end side closer to the crank 147 is pivoted to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. As it is pivoted back to its initial state. As a result, the ball feed operating rod 146 causes the left end portion (tip) near the ball feed crank 147 to swing in the vertical direction by the ball feed solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and extends in the left and right direction, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b disposed on the side opposite to the side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft portion 147b And a transmission portion 147c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, whereby the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be pivoted about an axis extending back and forth.

  When the ball feed solenoid 140 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed unit 140 is in a state where the ball feed operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is held Turn to That is, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 144 receives one game ball B, and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 137) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the ball extracting member 143 pivotally supported pivotally or by the weight portion 143 d. However, the actuating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball extracting member 143 abuts on the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 222 of the disc unit 200. In the normal state, since the rotation is restricted, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b, and is separated. The game ball B does not intrude.

  Then, when the player presses the upper disc ball extraction button of the dish unit downward, the upper disc ball extraction slider slides downward with the operation transmission unit, and the movement lever 143c is moved with the movement of the operation transmission section downward. Will move relatively downward. When the actuating rod 143c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion, the ball extracting member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition Is released. As a result, the gaming ball B entering from the entrance 141a drops toward the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball withdrawal guiding path 241c of the unit 240 after pulling out the upper ball in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper disc ball removal slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242 b with which the operation rod 143 c of the ball removal member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B on the partition part 143 a Can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the actuating rod 143c, so that breakage of the ball pullout member 143 etc. can be prevented, and the gaming ball B is a partition It is possible to prevent bouncing back at 143a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) etc.) that is recessed forward on the upper right in the back view of the hitting supply port 142a of the rear cover 142. A tamperproof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142 b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated into upper and lower portions 148a at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. A lower piece portion 148b, and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered manner on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other . The upper piece portion 148 a of the tamperproof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamperproof member 148 so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148 b extends in the same plane as the general surface of the tamperproof member 148. Thus, in the plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove extending toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b is in communication with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to this fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 and attached to the illegal gaming ball B The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit ball) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed such that the illegal game ball B is moved into and out of the first starting opening by operating the strap The V-shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b after the string attached to the illegal gaming ball B is inserted between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b by It is possible to cut off by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using an illegal gaming ball B attached with a string.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of a front cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed. The false cover unit 150 is attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in a rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 150 is a shallow box-like unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit main body 151 And 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and a through ball passage 150a which brings the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 into communication with the upper countersink supply port of the dish unit; The full ball receiving opening 150b is open toward the rear on the lower right side in the front view of the through ball passage 150a and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 .

  In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward at the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 150b and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main frame 4 The ball ball socket 150c for receiving the game ball B (far ball) and the game ball B which is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view and received by the full tank ball socket 150b and the ball ball socket 150c. And a ball outlet 150d for discharging forward and communicating with the lower ball inlet of the tray unit.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receptacle 150b and the far ball receptacle 150c and the ball outlet 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of gaming balls B. A reservoir passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through ball passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receptacle 150 b and the far ball receptacle 150 c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball outlet 150 d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  In addition, the flat cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152; And a spring 155 for biasing the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e. The full tank detection sensor 154 detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e.

  In the far cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the gaming balls B and the gaming balls B are not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, to some extent in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the gaming balls B moves the upper end of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. As the movable piece 153 rotates, the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls B, so if fullness is detected by the full detection sensor 154, the payout of more gaming balls B is stopped At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall of that effect, and to urge the player to eliminate the filling of the lower tray 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150 a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the dispensing passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 described later of the body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f is provided, which can be in contact with the actuating projection 613a of 613 (see FIG. 93). The door opening and closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to lower end of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full delivery passage 610b The front opening can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably inserted from the rear into the glass unit attachment portion 101 h so as to close the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 enables the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (forward) It closes the front of the area 5a.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 101h larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the inside of the glass frame 161 closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be in contact with the projection 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 99). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated longitudinally so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 99).

  The glass unit attachment member 163 has a disk-like base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a bar-like projection from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101 a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure to the procedure mentioned above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 by the protrusion 163b when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163 is located below the base 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the protrusion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the backward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 170 is disposed with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear projection 172 projecting short rearwardly along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 171, and left and right And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward beyond the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed along a portion of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection 172, and its strength and rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projection 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area It does not prevent the game ball B from being driven into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is resiliently locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the crime prevention cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projection 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the player. It is a thing.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182 A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is rotatably attached by an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 at the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 It has a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 held between the base 186 and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 to return the handle 182 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in a direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 and a tip end projecting outward from the left side in a front view outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 A single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 and a single-shot button 193 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186 and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 181b radially projecting from the front end of the base 181a, and a cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three grooves 181 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102 c of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state in which the three groove portions 181c coincide with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are respectively inserted in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is such that the side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the portion of the handle 182 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Is slightly lower. The second protrusion 182 b is configured such that the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges outward and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 182a It also protrudes slightly high. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182 d are inclined in a substantially linear shape, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183 a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183 a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by penetrating the slit 182 e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the attachment boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the attachment boss 183a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In the present example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and has a light transmitting property. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a three-dimensionally formed lens member of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (the open side). The handle unit 180 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can make the user perform the turning operation without a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 542 in the ball emission device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, when the handle 182 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is applied with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Thus, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Also, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button manipulation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193, the operation before the one-shot button 193 is performed. The game ball B can be re-injected into the game area 5a by the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes, in the handle 182, four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, and the handle 182 is rotated most in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Of the first protrusion 182 a when the fourth protrusion 182 d does not rotate the handle 182 when the game ball B is most strongly hit into the game area 5 a (so-called “right hit”). The position is substantially the same as the position, so that the player can maintain the handle 182 at the position of “right-handed” in a comfortable state by changing the fourth protrusion 182 d as the first protrusion 182 a and holding the handle 182. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit from the back. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the tray unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 at a position lower than the door window 101 a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper dish 201 and the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls B for hitting into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper dish 201 and the far cover unit 150 And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The pan unit 200 has a pan 201 and is mounted on the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The pan unit 210 is mounted on the front of the pan base unit 210. And a rendering operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-like plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate body 212 attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 attached to the front and projecting forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the top surface of the mounting base 213; An upper counterball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper counterball removal unit 240 mounted at the rear of the upper counterball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. Tray unit main body 252, a lower plate ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decorative unit 270 separately attached to the upper front of the plate unit main body 252 A dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 mounted below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 capable of rotating operation by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by pressing operation by the player. The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 for emitting and decorating the rendering operation ring 330, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320 Vibration speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 And have.

  The whole is bulging forward as a whole, and the rendering operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 is obliquely upward forward at the center in the lateral direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper surface While the upper plate 201 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, the ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed, and the lower plate 202 is disposed on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and to the left of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed of the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in the shape of a container which is largely expanded forward on the left side than the center in the left and right in a front view. In the upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding to the rear as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). See). In the upper tray 201, the entire bottom surface including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end side in a front view of the guiding passage portion 201a is below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is placed on the lower end of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper ball supply port 211a. It inclines so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thus, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

  The induction passage portion 201a is provided with a metal earth metal fitting 201b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to make the game ball Static electricity charged to B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction in a front view. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the gaming balls B, and is provided at the bottom wall with a lower countersink extraction hole 202a which penetrates up and down and can discharge the gaming balls B. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202 a of the lower tray 202 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lower bowl ball extraction unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends leftward and rightward, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray 202, lower countersink holes 202a penetrating vertically are disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower ball open hole 202a. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located in front of the lower bowl ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the tray unit 200.

  The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower flat ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and open the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the above can be discharged to the lower side (e.g., dollar box) of the dish unit 200. Further, in the state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower flat ball supply port 211c, so It is possible to quickly discharge the released game ball B downward from the lower ball extraction hole 202a by the movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front.

  The plate base unit 210 is a flat plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The mounting base 213 is attached to the right of the main body 212 and the upper pan body 212 at the upper front of the pan unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213 at the front of the pan unit base 211 And the tray unit relay board 214.

  Further, the bowl base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper bowling ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , And an after-the-counter ball removal unit 240 mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 211 at the rear of the table ball removal front unit 230.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open rear) Box-shaped).

  The pan unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan ball supply port 211a and the upper pan and ball supply port 211a extending cylindrically rearward. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower circular bulb supply port 211c which penetrates back and forth in the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and cylindrically extends backward; A notch 211d is notched in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c and has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and front and rear in the front right upper side of the lower flat ball supply port 211c And an upper flat ball feed port 211e which extends upward and downward and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, and is raised on the left side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, on which the mounting base is placed. A slider insertion port 211g which penetrates back and forth in the lower part of the pan body and into which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper disc ball removal slider 242 of the upper disc ball removal unit 240 is inserted and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view Handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view And a mouth 211i.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 211 a of the bowl unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper bowl 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper bowl ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101 g is penetrated from the front side to be connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B dispensed from the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 is supplied (dispensed) into the upper tray 201 through the upper ball dispensing port 211 a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and the cylindrical rear end is the lower disc ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected with the front end of ball emission mouth 150d of far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower countersink supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball extraction guiding path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the removal of the upper ball is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower ball supply port 211c. ing. Thus, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is operated by the upper plate ball extraction button 222, the upper ball supply port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the upper The lower ball and ball supply port 211c is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b and the ball removal and introducing passage 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper flat ball feeding port 211 e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241 a of the rear base 241 in the upper flat ball dropping unit 240 in a state assembled to the flat base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the unit 240 after ball removal to the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the upper dish 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends in the left and right direction, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges forward largely from the center in the left and right in a front view. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes backward as going from the most bulging part to the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B ing. The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper tray main body 212 is closed at the top near the right end.

  The upper tray main body 212 is attached to the lower end of the bowl unit 200 so that the portion closed at the upper side in the vicinity of the right end sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled in the tray unit 200. Further, in the upper tray main body 212, a rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper portion, and a part of the rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the pan base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the pan unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211 f of the pan unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper side is open. The mounting base 213 is provided with an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetration port 213b penetrating vertically in the rear right corner.

  The insertion hole 213a of the mounting base 213 is a hole through which the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is removed. Moreover, the wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213 b.

[3-5-3 d. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay substrate 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, the plate lower right decorative substrate 288, and the operation unit relay substrate 392 It is to do. The tray unit relay substrate 214 is attached to the right of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the back side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the bowl base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 Or, after inserting a prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine, or use the ball rental machine It is for deducting and returning the part of the game ball B from which the cash and prepaid card thrown in to were loaned out, or returning.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball extraction button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221 A light transmitting disc-like ball lending operation base 223 disposed to the right of the extraction button 222, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper ball ball extraction button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is configured of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be viewed through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball extraction button 222. Further, after inserting a prepaid card with cash or balance into the ball lending machine and pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display unit when the ball rental machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Upper flat ball removal unit and upper flat ball removal unit]
The unit 230 for removing the upper ball and the unit for removing the upper ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper flat ball extraction unit 230 and the upper flat ball extraction unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed to operate the upper tray 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower tray 202.

  The upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement projection 211 f on the front surface of the bowl unit base 211. The upper bowl ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the bowl unit base 211 at a position behind the upper bowl ball removal unit 230.

  The upper ball and ball removal front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the disk unit base 211 and extends in the up and down direction, and is movably inserted in the cylinder of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 211 near the front of the upper pan and ball feed port 211 e and the slider insertion port 211 g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper flat ball extraction. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper countersink ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the disk unit base 211 so as to close the upper ball and ball supply port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction An upper ball ball slide slider 242 slidably mounted, a spring 243 urging the upper ball ball slide slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241; Is equipped.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is opened forward and a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. The ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received gaming ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and the game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b And a ball extraction guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and guiding it to the right in a rear view.

  The ball socket 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feed guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feed unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the gaming ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 is made to enter the entrance 141 a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241 a and the ball feeding guide path 241 b.

  The portions of the ball extraction guide path 241c that extend to the left and right are projected to the right in the rear view and inclined so that the right end in the rear view is lower than the part to which the upper disc ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached. And open on the right side in a rear view. The rear side of the ball extension guiding path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The upper part of the part extending vertically up and down below the ball feeding and guiding passage 241b is located in front of the ball pulling out port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when the ball pulling and guiding passage 241c is assembled in the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending leftward and rightward is formed so as to be connected to the notch portion 211 d of the lower circular bulb supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the gaming ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guiding path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

  The upper flat ball slide slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242 a that protrudes forward from the upper left corner and the operation receiving portion 242 a And an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a is formed flat. In addition, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper ball ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the front flat ball. Further, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation transmission portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates the ball extraction member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. A weir 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper countersink slider 242, and the upper countersink slider 242 is biased upward. Therefore, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

The upper counter ball removal unit 230 and the upper counter ball removal unit 240 have the upper counter ball removal slider 242 positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper counter ball removal slider 242 The upper flat screen extraction button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper flat ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmission portion 242b is blocked. The partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b to separate the two.

  Therefore, in a state in which the upper ball and ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141 a and the ball extraction hole 141 b is separated in the ball feeding unit 140, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball socket 241 a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting supply port 142a to the ball emitting device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 The actuating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removal member 143 rotates the ball removal member 143 to divide the partition 143a. Is retracted from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the gaming ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receptacle 241a and the ball feed guiding path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. It will be done. The gaming ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower flat ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper plate 201 are discharged into the lower plate 202 after being discharged into the plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is released, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper pan via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 is lifted, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the actuating rod 143c in contact with the actuating transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  As described above, the gaming ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202 and is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 is decorating almost the whole of the dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish main body 251 and the dish unit base to cover the outer circumference of the lower dish main body 251. A bowl unit main body 252 attached to the front of the bowl 211, a lower bowl ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower bowl main body 251, and a bowl separately mounted on the upper front of the bowl unit main body 252 Upper left decorative unit 270 and lower right upper decorative unit 275, and lower left upper decorative unit 280 and lower right upper decorative unit 275 mounted on the entire surface of lower unit body 252, lower left lower decorative unit 280 and lower right lower decorative unit And 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) which extends in the left and right direction and is open at the upper and the rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the front lower portion of the tray unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear is closed.

  The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends in the left and right direction, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray main body 251, in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view, a lower countersink hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed. The lower tray main body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof is lowered toward the lower spherical ball opening 202a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball ball extraction lid 265 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower tray body 251 is in a state in which the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the tray unit main body 252 in a state where the lower tray main body 251 is assembled in the tray decoration unit 250. Further, the lower tray main body is in a state assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is positioned lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is a lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210, and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The pan unit body 252 bulges so that the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left and right direction bulges forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the plate unit main body 252 is curved such that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in the shape of a box opened rearward.

  The pan unit main body 252 bulges forward toward the center in the left and right direction from the left and right ends in the upper part and extends upward and separately from the upper side bulged part 252a spaced apart in the left and right And a bottom plate portion 252c extending in the form of a flat plate from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b to the rear in such a manner as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251. .

  The left and right upper side bulged parts 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and the front left dish upper left decoration unit 270, the lower left lower decoration unit 280, the upper right upper decoration unit 275 and the lower right decoration unit 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The pan unit main body 252 is formed with a lower pan opening 252d which penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that the player's finger can be inserted, and the lower plate opening 252d is formed to be wider upward and downward as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 is a front notch portion 252e which is notched upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is notched at a lower part of The lower countersunk ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Furthermore, the pan unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted; It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h which penetrates the decoration part 252b back and forth and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging parts 252a which becomes the center in the horizontal direction. And a rendering operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where it is assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower disc ball extraction button 263 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260 faces forward from the front notch portion 252e, and the lower disc ball extraction base 261 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower bowl ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and stores the game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges the game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction holes 202a. It is intended to

  The lower disc ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower disc body 251 and has a flat lower disc ball extraction base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view; A slider 262 slidably mounted to the front and back on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower countersunk ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward; The lower disc ball lid 265 opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and the holding mechanism 266 holds the lower disc ball lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262.

  The lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed to close the bottom notch 252f of the disk unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a of the lower disk 202 (lower disk main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front and rear direction, and is slidably mounted on the lower disc ball removal base 261 in the front and rear direction at a position from the center in the left-right direction to the left. The slider 262 is provided with a projecting pin projecting cylindrically upward.

  The lower disc ball ejection lid 265 is attached to the lower disc ball ejection base 261 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending up and down at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at the left end side. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower flat ball lid 265 is formed with a slit extending in the left and right direction in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 260, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the plate unit main body 252 in a state assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate 252c. In addition, the lower countersunk ball extraction button 263 is facing forward from the front cutout 252e of the main dish unit main body 252. Under normal conditions, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower microcontroller ball lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole in the normal state. And the through hole (the lower countersink hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265, and the gaming ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in the normal state, the front surface of the lower ball ball extraction button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  Under normal conditions, when the lower ball extraction button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower ball extraction button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower flat ball lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower flat ball lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end is backward It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower countersunk ball lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower countersink hole 202a is opened, The gaming ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  In addition, when the slider 262 is moved backward by the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 is not moved forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower ball removal cover 265 is kept turned to the rear, and the lower ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the gaming balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously used. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower ball extraction hole 202a from this state, when the lower ball extraction button 263 which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pushed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. Ru. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball releasing button 263 returns to the state where it matches the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower ball removal cover 265 is pivoted so that the right end side is located immediately above the through hole, and the lower ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265. Thus, the gaming balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5-4e. Upper left decoration unit and upper right decoration unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the main unit 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are for decorating the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semicylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271 A dish upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the back side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending to the left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the back into the dish upper left decoration 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the plate upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decoration substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper left decoration 271 can be made to emit light.

  The left upper part of the upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the left left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the upper central decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left decoration 271 is The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semicylindrical shape extending laterally and has a light transmitting property, the dish upper right decoration 276 and the dish upper right reflector 277 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right decoration 276, A dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is mounted on the back side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decoration 276 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely rightward at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from behind into the dish upper right decoration 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decoration 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decoration 276 can be decorated to emit light.

  The right upper part of the upper right decoration unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the upper part decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are illuminated, the entire front face of the dish upper right decoration 276 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4 f. Lower left decoration unit and lower right decoration unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower front of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the main unit 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. Be The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 .

  The lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The lower left decoration 281 has a lower left reflector 282 mounted on the rear side of the lower left decoration 281. A dish lower left decorative substrate 283 mounted on the back side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The lower left decorative body 281 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decorative body 271 and the upper right decorative body 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped so that the semi-cylinder is bent. The left lower end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. This dish lower left decoration 281 is formed milky white.

  The lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The lower left decoration substrate 283 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the lower left decoration 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decoration board 283 is a full color LED, and by emitting light, the lower left decoration 281 can be made to emit light.

  With the lower left decoration unit 280 assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it looks as if the left end is sunk into the door frame 3. The lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical, horizontally extending, light transmitting dish lower right decoration 286 and a dish lower right decoration attached to the back of the dish lower right decoration 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decoration substrate 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The dish lower right decoration 286 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a of the right side. The lower right decoration 286 is a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the half cylinder is formed to be bent. The right lower end of the lower right decoration 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. This dish lower right decoration 286 is formed milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the back into the inside of the dish lower right decoration 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288. The lower right decoration substrate 288 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending leftward and rightward along the lower right decoration 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish lower right decoration 286 can be decorated with light emission.

  The right lower end of the lower right decoration unit 285 is located below the right end of the upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. In the lower right decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration 286 of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decoration unit 285 has no rib in the middle of the dish lower right decoration 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plural LEDs of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the dish lower right decoration 286 The entire front surface of the light emitting device can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the pan unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the direction of movement of the effect operation button. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and while decorating the plate unit 200, the player operates and participates in the rendering when the player participation type rendering is performed. It can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than a half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. The ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation portion 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 A transmission gear 350 for operation ring that transmits rotation between the unit 302 and the gear 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for operation ring to the operation portion base 320.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the rendering operation ring 330, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 The decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the above, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face inside the ring of the effect operation ring 330 The rendering operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Effect operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and expanded forward, and a unit front The dish center upper reflector 313 is mounted from the rear in the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decoration substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear in the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 And a lower center decoration substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit main body 252 It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to a virtual plane formed on the front semicircular arc extending upper end edge is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drainage holes 311 a formed at the lowest position when assembled into the pan unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape in which the shape of the unit front cover 312 bulges forward so that the shape in plan view follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. It is attached. The unit front cover 312 is a plate central upper decoration 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front below the dish central upper decoration 312a. And a dish center lower decoration body 312 b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulging semicircular arc follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the dish center lower decoration 312 b.

  The plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed by dividing a cylinder of substantially the same thickness (radius) into halves and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the dividing surface facing the center side It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends with a large curvature in a semicircular arc shape with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It has a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish upper center decoration 312a protrudes forward than the front end of the dish center lower decoration 312b. Further, when assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper center decoration body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275 The left and right ends of 312 b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed milky white.

  The front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about half the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish upper central reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape which bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish central upper decoration body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) on the upper surface Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper center decoration body 312a can be illuminated and decorated.

  The lower center dish reflector 315 is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the lower stage center decoration 312 b of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The lower center dish reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower center dish decoration substrate 316 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) on the upper surface Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b can be lighted and decorated.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of extending in a semicircular arc shape in the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, so When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower center lower decoration substrate 316 are made to emit light, the whole can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end projecting forward more than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish upper center decoration body 312a is continuous with the dish upper left decoration body 271 and the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b is the dish lower left decoration body 281 and the dish right It is continuous with the lower decoration 286. Thus, the rendering operation unit 300 is made to stand out and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5-5 b. Controller base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper tray main body 212 in the dish base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper side is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having a substantially cubic outer shape and extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 whose upper portion is open, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape The upper attachment which is formed on the flange base 322, the plurality of (here four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom of the main body 321, and the rear end of the flange 322 and attached to the disc base unit 210 A portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 which is opened upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outside of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for operation ring.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into a sound such as voice or music and output it. it can.

  The leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. In the main body portion 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outer side of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outer side of the rear wall.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer periphery thereof substantially matches the inner periphery of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312. A rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 and a decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the rendering operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for operation ring around an axis extending in the left and right direction in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is attached to the gear bearing 325, the upper portion of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring protrudes upward, and the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is a flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  The upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly lower than the upper surface of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in a state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 300. Moreover, in the state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with it.

[3-5-5 c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 55, FIG. 56 and the like. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 which can be rotationally operated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) about twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

  The rendering operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and rotatably mounted around a vertically extending shaft on the ring mounting base 331 and are attached to the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotating base 332 upward And a ring retaining member 334 which regulates the movement.

  Also, the rendering operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 that constitutes a part of the rotational operation portion 302 and the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation portion 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 to constitute a part of the rotation operation portion 302 And an in-ring cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light transmitting annular shape.

  The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the placement portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably disposed in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge and the placement portion 331a on the upper surface And a boss 331 b for projecting cylindrically upward from a plurality (four in this case) of parts and for mounting the bush 333 rotatably and spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting part 331 a on the upper surface And a through-hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. The plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The outer diameter of the rotation base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332 a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed in a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes to the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332 a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332 a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332 a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350 a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which circular arcs forming the outer and upper portions in a circular shape are arranged three-dimensionally And an outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extending in the circumferential direction after extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335 a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc in the range of 1⁄4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335 b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335 c extends slightly lower than the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer lower portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a in the circumferential direction And a plurality of outer lower cover attachment portions 336b arranged in plural. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336 b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc constituting an inner upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis And an inner cover attachment portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1⁄8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337 c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion in the range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 is capable of emitting light by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5 d. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the rear. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the left front. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating and driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for operation ring A gear cover rotatably mounting the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covering the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side 346, and.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346, and detects a rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape which is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and opened leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is constituted by a spur gear-like first gear 344a meshing with the drive gear, and a spur gear-like second gear 344b integrally rotating with the first gear 344a and having a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a having a diameter (a size twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) larger than the transmission gear 344 and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345 b have a length in the circumferential direction equal to the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345 b are arranged circumferentially at intervals of a rotational angle of 45 degrees. The detection pieces 345 b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345 b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated at a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is supposed to be. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected through the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring. Engage with Further, the whole of the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 can freely set the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 may cause the rotary operation unit 302 to oscillate in a reciprocating manner by oscillating the drive gear 343 by means of the operation ring drive motor 342 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  In the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345 b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction of the rotation operation. The rotation operation of the player can be assisted by driving the motor 342, and the rotation operation of the player is controlled by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Can be loaded. Therefore, by combining these as appropriate, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or click feeling according to the contents of the player participation type effect.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The transmission gear 350 for operation ring of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation portion base 320 It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The transmission gear 350 for operation ring rotates integrally with the ring gear portion 350a in the bevel gear shape, which meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340 And a spur gear-like drive-side gear portion 350b engaged with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The pitch circle of the ring gear portion 350a and the drive gear portion 350b are formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-like ring side gear portion 350 a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for operation ring is inserted from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320, and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation portion base 320, so that it is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320. Be

  In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted and rotated.

[3-5-5 f. Effect operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can emit light and decorate the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided back and forth, and a front decoration substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the front side, and a semicircle on the rear side It is comprised with the back decoration board | substrate 352b formed in the elongate strip plate shape which has arc shape. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is covered with a decoration substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. Similar to the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, the decoration substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear, and is a front substrate cover that covers the front decoration substrate 352a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 A rear substrate cover 353 b and a rear substrate cover 353 b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 from the upper side covering the rear decorative substrate 352 b are configured.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and thereby the rotation operation unit 302 is configured through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331 c of the ring attachment base 331. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated and decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the light emission decoration that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and can output various frequencies of vibration in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds (sounds) such as sound, sound effects, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player has a feeling as if the effect operation unit 300 is shaking. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared to a vibration device in which a decentered weight is rotated by a motor, and can provide a player with more various effects.

  The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, in order to resonate, it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, the hardness, and the attachment method, so that sound information of only a specific frequency is input. In this case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in the characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is input as a frequency having a width rather than being a single frequency. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (sweeped) eight times in about one second for each one cycle in 1 Hz units. Intermittently, this is intermittently input for 1 second, and input is repeated again after 1 second.

  In the assembly work of the gaming machine, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game is operated for inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment. It is supposed to be based on that. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (or when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the inspector operates the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command to clear and initialize the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation check process for testing the vibration speaker (operation check). The inspector can confirm the sound (sound) such as voice and music from the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation process, and can also check the vibration of the rendering operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5 h. Production operation button unit]
The rendering operation button unit 360 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. FIG. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and FIG. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 which can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is configured of a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has an outer periphery formed in a substantially circular shape, and is disposed at an object bordering on a central axis of the button unit base 361 attached within the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the button unit base 361. A disc-like member having a pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having a circular outer periphery smaller than the button unit base 361 Between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, the guide shaft 362 is movably attached in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  In addition, the presentation operation button unit 360 extends cylindrically upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has a central shaft 366 whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363 and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361 Engaging with the operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361 and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably inserted by the central shaft 366 being inserted therein. 370, the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected and the central shaft A lift cam member 371 for vertically moving the lift base 364 by inserting and rotatably attaching and moving the lift base 364, the lift drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lift cam drive gear member 370 is covered from above. And a disk-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose inner diameter is larger than the upper base and extends vertically, and is mounted movably in the vertical direction by the pair of guide shafts 362 above the lift base 364 Substantially the same as the central button main body 373 and a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the elevation base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward; The central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter and the upper end side is closed and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing portion 303a.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button main body 373 on the upper surface of the elevation base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted; An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative substrate 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 and a portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covering the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and raised and lowered so as to cover the outer peripheral surface and upper surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having translucency with three-dimensional decoration A transparent perimeter button attached to the base 364 with the center button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is configured by the outer periphery substrate cover 378, the outer periphery decoration lens 379, and the outer periphery button cover 380.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and the elevation cam driving gear member 370. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting a rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base main body 361 a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361 b projecting downward from the base main body 361 a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed in a size slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The lower end of the leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached on the top surface of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361 a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter that is about one half of the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevation base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The lift base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 is slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrated with a size that allows the lift cam member 371 to pass through at the center. An upright wall portion 364c cylindrically projecting upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axial core and rotatably mounted around the axial core.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The upper end of the upright wall 364c abuts on the upper base 363 to restrict the upward movement of the elevating base 364 and a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button main body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364c. It is formed. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The lift cam drive gear member 370 has a spur gear-like gear portion 370a engaged with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b projecting upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the lift cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. The elevating detection piece 370 c has two cylindrical portions projecting downward from the lower side and facing each other, which are notched and detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The lift cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by the central shaft 366 being inserted at the center. The lift cam member 371 is spaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface, and includes a pair of cam portions 371a protruding outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pins 364 d of the elevation base 364.

  The cam portion 371a has a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end parallel to the axial center, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364 d of the lift base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371 a.

  Further, the lift cam member 371 is provided at the lower end thereof with a connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the lift cam drive gear member 370.

  The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the lift cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as. The raising and lowering cam member 371 can rotate and thereby guide the guide pin 364d of the raising and lowering base 364 by the cam portion 371a to raise and lower the raising and lowering base 364.

  The central button body 373 penetrates the cylindrical portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b, and the pair of guide shafts A pair of guide holes 373c into which the guide 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevation base 364 and downward from the bottom 373b It includes a pressing detection piece 373 e which is projected and detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373 f which project in a cylindrical shape rearward from the bottom portion 373 b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the cylindrical portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom 373 b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373 d is formed in a cylindrical shape which is extended short downward, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the lift base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button main body 373 is restricted. Through the central opening 373 d of the central button body 373, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f is inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f is formed such that the lower end extends downward through the lift base 364 and a screw having a washer inserted therein is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts the lower surface of the lift base 364 to restrict the upward movement of the central button body 373.

  When the bottom portion 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the elevation base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 It is formed to project downward through 364. The central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevation springs 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to be translucent. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

  The central button decoration substrate 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface as full color LEDs. The center button decoration substrate 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full color LEDs. The outer circumference button decoration substrate 377 can cause the outer circumference decoration lens 379 and the outer circumference button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and has an annular base portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and cylindrically extending upward from the inner periphery of the base portion 378a. And a cylindrical portion 378 b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as going upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending to the center side from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the effect operation button unit 360, in the assembled state, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is in a state where the elevation base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevation springs 365, The locking portion 371 c of the cam portion 371 a of the lift cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 Also project upward (see FIG. 63 etc.).

  In this state (the state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373 e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303 a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven through the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. While rolling to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in one cam 371b, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relative to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 causes the guide pin 364d to move upward along the second cam 371d. At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to be in the raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in the state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 moves upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected to a position larger than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 when moved to the raised position in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300 (see FIG. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes in contact with the lift base 364. In a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevation base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the central button main body 373 protrudes downward relative to the elevation base 364, but the elevation base 364 is a button unit base 361. Because the pressure detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevation spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and along with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button main body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button main body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 However, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressure on the center button cover 375 (center pressure operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force more than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 lifts the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380 The lower end of the lifting base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevation base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) protrudes upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body The pressing detection piece 373 e does not protrude downward from the elevation base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer periphery button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising and lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button raising and lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 is moved downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d becomes the first cam Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 364d into the locking portion 371c which is recessed upward, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay substrate unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay substrate 392 attached inside the substrate box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay substrate 392 is a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a presentation operation ring decoration board 352, a vibration speaker Relay the connection between the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the central button decoration substrate 376, the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the pressure detection sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 There is.

[3-5-5 j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in the plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing section It is a front view of a saucer unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player on the top surface. The effect operation unit 301 is configured of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a circular center pressing operation unit 303 a positioned at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer periphery pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And 303 b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303 a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b is formed by the outer periphery button cover 380 and the outer periphery substrate cover 378.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operating unit 302 (the rendering operation ring 330) is lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward) .

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Figure 63 etc.)

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates clockwise in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can repeat the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in a range of a predetermined rotation angle to swing the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth to vibrate. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in left side view through the transmission gear 350 for operation ring, and the rotation is performed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors of a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345 b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 spaced apart in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The intervals are not integer multiples. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. Do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. The rotational speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342. At the same time, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, whereby the rotation operation can be made heavier or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more circular arc extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And since the rotation operation part 302 is attached in the state which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of inner peripheral surface exposed, as shown in figure, it is formed in the shape which is easy to grasp with a player's hand .

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that the player can easily do, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 Sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the rotation operation part 302 is attached to the operation part base 320 on the lower surface side, it can not be grasped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the rendering operation unit 300 is provided below the rendering operation ring 330 with a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged. Thus, the light emitting decoration of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be performed by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to emit light and decorate only a specific part of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, the player can be illusive as if the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descent position which projected slightly upwards. In this state, the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303 a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). The sensor 381 detects a press.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) is not moved downward, and the pressing is detected The sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  In the normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b) The biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the pressing base 303 along with the lifting base 364 to vigorously project upward to be in the state of the rising position (see FIG. 65B). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the center pressing unit 303a is pressed downward with the pressing unit 303 in the raised position, first, the center pressing unit 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374 to move the center pressing unit 303a. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b are the rotation operating unit 302. The height is substantially the same as that of the upper surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects a press.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 presses the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b downward with the pressing operation unit 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a is projected above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b. The outer periphery pressing unit 303b and the center pressing unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing unit 303b becomes substantially flush with the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 65A). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment can not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, attention can be drawn to the operation of the rendering operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type can be more enjoyable.

  In addition, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotating operation may be facilitated by the pressing operation unit 303 or may be difficult to perform due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more versatile operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 66 to FIG. Fig.66 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a in the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the front of the door frame left side base 401 A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape which extends vertically and is opened forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending up and down along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is done. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can cause the door frame left-side decoration 404 to emit light and decorate by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate.

  The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the form which the half circular arc bulging forward extended up and down. Thus, the door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453 It is formed to be continuous with the lower end on the left side of.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and appears as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends from the right side of the door frame 3 in the form of a flat plate to the front substantially to the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left and right direction And a light emitting side window interior decoration 410b disposed in a plurality in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 is a player who makes it difficult to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right in the gaming hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 inconspicuous, and to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward cylindrically and arranged in a row vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the plurality of side window in-window decorative members 412 And an internal reflector 414 which is inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration 410b.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed to the front of the front end of the side window inner decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the door frame A door extending in a plate shape in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and having a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction to constitute a side window 410a It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 Door frame having a through-hole 417a which extends in the shape of a circle and which penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the right side reflector 415 And a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and being opened rearward. The in-side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a connecting the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) in-side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window inner decoration portion 410b of the side window inner decoration member 412 is formed in a truncated cone-like cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed hemispherical ing. In the side window inner decoration member 412, the front end of the side window inner decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower side position to the upper side with respect to the vertical center. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed to have a translucent white light.

  The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending up and down along the side window interior decoration member 412, and in the front surface of the door frame right side base 411, the side window interior decoration member 412 Is attached to the rear of the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape of upper, lower, left, and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is done.

  The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The inner reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window inner decoration portion 410b into four in the upper, lower, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wave shape such that it moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates in the front and rear direction, and a plurality of through holes 415 a are formed in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, a through hole 417a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending up and down along the door frame right side decoration 419, and is configured of a right side upper decoration substrate 418a and a right side lower decoration substrate 418b. It is done. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration 419 to emit light and decorate by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

  The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavelike manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450 It is formed to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends in a wavelike manner forward so that a quarter of the portion from the top protrudes forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and can visually recognize the opposite side through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window inner decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LEDs of the side window inner decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window interior decoration 410b can be illuminated and decorated. Then, the light emission decoration is performed on the side window inner decoration portion 410b, so that the inside of the side window 410a can be made bright and the opposite side can be made less visible through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, since the LED of the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of in-window decorative portions 410b is turned off in the normal state, the side window It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for this pachinko machine 1 (this game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of this pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities, this pachinko machine 1 is simplified. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the other part including the in-side window decorative part 410b. It is possible to make the whole game area 5a hard to see from the player, and by making it hard to receive the feeling as seen from other players, it is possible to cause the other players to play the game without hesitation .

  Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a glare, and the visibility through the side window 410a changes Let At this time, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial manner, so the side window inner decoration portions 410b are made to be dazzling and the opposite side is made between them It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a from another player such as the next player. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to avoid that another player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the other player is distracted by being noticed. Can prevent you from feeling uncomfortable because you can not concentrate on playing games, or you can feel you are lost due to the induction of mistakes, and you can make the game more fun by letting the player concentrate on playing games It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and (c) is an outside of the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451 attached on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451 And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the frame.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted A door frame top right decoration substrate 457 attached to the right of the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front Have.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and is attached to the front of the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top decoration Between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front of the top top cover 452.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached respectively to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 from below And a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from the lower side, and a door frame top Door frame top relay mounted near upper right end of base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 is a flat plate-like main body portion 451a extending in the right and left in the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction; And a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451 a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined in such a way as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in the shape of a box opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most projecting forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward as going from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front on the upper surface. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a curvature which becomes smaller as going from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 It is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the lateral direction bulges upward Extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape such that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically separated between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a which are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462; and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically in the lateral direction outside of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464; ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front as full color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can emit light and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decoration 453 to emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs appropriately.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 Through holes are formed at the positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending leftward and rightward, and is mounted such that the pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and frontward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

  The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, and the front end thereof is locked to the top upper cover 452 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and the outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419 to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As illustrated, the door frame 3 has, at the center in a front view, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is the dish upper left decoration 271 of the dish unit 200, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame The outer periphery of the door window 101 a is surrounded by the door frame 101 a by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  Top left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, top right decorative body 276, top center decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body Since the reference numeral 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish upper center decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame 101 Behind the door frame top decoration 453, the dish upper left decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration board 278, dish upper center decoration board 314, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top central decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be made to emit light by emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate appropriately. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is coaxially disposed on the upper surface in an annular annular donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 whose diameter is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 and the rotation operating unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 below the rotation operation unit 302. Of the upper and lower two-centered upper decoration 322a and the lower center decoration 312b of a large diameter donut shape (semi-cylindrical shape or semi-tubular shape), The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration of the plate 312b, the door frame right side unit 41 Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, three doughnut-shaped members are vertically aligned with the rotation operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower center decoration 3a and 312b, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer periphery Since the pressing operation unit 303 b and the center pressing operation unit 303 a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish lower left decoration 281 disposed below the dish upper center decoration 312a, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish lower center decoration 312b, The tube-like tube has a slightly smaller thickness, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the lower center dish decoration 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 is larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation portion 302 or the like operable by the player disposed on the upper side. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the tray unit 200, the doughnut-shaped rotational operation portion 302 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotational operation portion 302 has the front end side Since the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 turns. The entire volume of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily viewed, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since it is possible to immediately make the player recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 performs the rotation operation, the player rotates immediately when the player participation type effect is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b project more forward than the upper plate 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation section 302, the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are made to stand out At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the pachinko machine 1 different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to make the player's interest strongly attract and appeal to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 76 to FIG. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box whose front is open as shown in the figure, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Can be mounted.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion is insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. Body frame upper hinge member 510 to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted and the body frame mounted on the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2; Body frame lower hinge set attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in a front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball emitting device 540 for driving the game ball B inside, an inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 mounted along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, and the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 which is attached to the rear side of the game machine so as to be openable and closable and which covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501; And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connecting cable guide member for guiding a connecting frame 503 for connecting the main body frame base 501 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose shape in front view extends vertically and a door frame 3 side. And 502 a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The dispensing base unit 550 is a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-like ball tank attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and having a slot-like guide channel extending leftward in the form of a groove opened upward, and attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 Between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be spaced leftward from the first rail cover 554 At the upper end of the tank rail 553 and at the downstream end of the tank rail 553. It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 has a ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding passage for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and the gaming ball guided by the one guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. B. Payout device 580 that pays out one at a time based on an instruction from payout control board 633, upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding gaming ball B which has passed through discharge device 580 downward, and upper full ball path And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the back surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the back side of the base unit 620b. 620 c, a payout control unit 620 d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620 c, and an interface unit 620 e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620 a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a plurality of door frame wedges 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame ridge 652 or the outer frame ridge 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame ridge 652 downward. A lock spring 655 which biases and presses the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 which moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Main unit frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame, and FIG. 83 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guiding member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front to the rear, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide the connecting cable 503 And a game board lock member 505 rotatably mounted on a lower portion of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 in an attachable and detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion slot 501b which penetrates back and forth in the height range of the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b is formed, and the game board on which the game board 5 is placed A placement board 501c, and a game board regulation part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left and right and backward.

  Further, the main frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front of the base main body 501a in the front view, and the launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540; It penetrates back and forth in the cylinder insertion port 501f which penetrates back and forth in the front view right side of the part 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth in the front view lower left side of the game board placement part 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward under the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. The cable attachment recess 501 h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached and the positive of the cable attachment recess 501 h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the front right side of the gaming board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 640 is at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the rear extension portion 501j rotatably mounted and the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a, and for mounting the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably mounted on the main body frame base 501 at a position below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b, thereby making the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b removable.

  The cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is attached to the right of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501 h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 is projected forward on both the upper and lower sides of a flat guide body 502a extending in the left and right direction and the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are extended, a cylindrical attachment shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right ends of the guide main body 502a And a plurality of through holes 502d aligned in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connecting cable guiding member 502 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501 h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 etc., the connection cable guiding member 502 is an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 by the connection cable guide member. In a state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide main body 502a so as to extend leftward from the right side of the guide main body 502a of 502, the lateral direction is the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being clamped together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 which penetrated to the pair of through-holes 502d of the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 in a state where the assembly door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and the door frame relay board cover It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed to the left of the left end of the connection cable guiding member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the open angle α of the door frame 3 and the open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies: α / 2 ≧ β (desirably, α / 3 ≧ β) (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guiding member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α becomes larger, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees) Transition as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward relative to the main body frame base 501. The guiding of the connection cable 503 can prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 is relatively moved backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guiding member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guiding member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, since the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guiding member 502 is folded 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connecting cable 503 is folded at the folded part. You can put on a bribe. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the force for closing the connection cable 503 is acted upon by the fold when the 180-folded portion of the connection cable 503 is changed to open. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) from moving in the opening direction by its fold, and the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the side of the door frame 3, the cable holder 103a is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guiding member 502, and the door rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 centering on the central axes (axial centers) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126. A tangent line contacting a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) projecting backward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and an angle of 45 degrees crossing the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is configured to be as follows. Thereby, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the tip end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 opened through the connection cable 503. Since it is possible to press in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 which rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Main frame upper hinge member]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  An upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511 And a main frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically in the front view left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 at a horizontally extending portion, and the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 Have.

  A portion of the upper hinge main body 511 which is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501 k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted in the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 can be mounted so that the main frame 4 can be hinged rotatably relative to the outer frame 2 in cooperation with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520, and the door frame relative to the main frame 4 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape upward And a lower hinge second body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate material extending horizontally is bent in an L shape upward. The lower horizontal hinge assembly 520 is provided with a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 at a distance from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower portion thereof. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below for the outer frame It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a at the left side of the horizontally extending portion, for restricting the pivoting range of the door frame 3; And. The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 5011 of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. Be The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the main frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main frame 4. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 81, FIG. 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The cross-sectional shape in plan view of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed in a U shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion material.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted forward and upward to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position control members 531 are vertically spaced apart and attached.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door unit 3 is attached to the main unit 4 It is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can strike the gaming ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 541 in a front view From around the tip of the hitting ball 543, a shooting solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose axis extends forward through the shooting base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the shooting solenoid 542, and The game ball B is mounted on the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward and to the left, and the game ball B is rollable.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feed unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544 When the handle 182 is turned in the state where it is in motion, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hit ball 543. The game ball B hit by the hitting ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rails 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002) Between the two, it falls to the ball socket 150 c of the lower far cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the far cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Disbursement base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. Fig. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as viewed from the rear. Dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of main body frame base unit 500.

  The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a top plate portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view A left side plate portion 551b that extends substantially the same width downward and a right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the front right side of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. Back plate left portion 551e which extends to the lower end by width, inner plate portion 551f extending backward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and left plate portion 551b From the front of the lower side to the right It includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and in an L shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, a collar portion 551da protruding rearward is formed in the left and right direction at a portion separated from the lower side by a predetermined length.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the lateral direction substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the game board slot 501b of the main frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is the upper and lower sides of the game board slot 501b It extends up and down approximately the same length as the direction height. The front end of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c of the dispensing base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion which is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the portion is dispensed Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner side plate portion 551 f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551 i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  Dispensing base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of top plate portion 551a of dispensing base 551 and extends in the left and right box-like ball tank 552 opened upward, and the portion of dispensing base 551 extending in the left and right And a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 at the upper side and extending in the form of a groove opened upward to the left.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 on the left side of the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction, A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553 and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 And a ball stopper 557 attached near the left end in the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded to be opaque black, and the left and right direction is formed about half the width of the top plate portion 551 a of the dispensing base 551 in the left and right direction. In addition, the front-rear direction is formed to have a length shorter than the depth of the top plate 551a in the front-rear direction. The ball tank 552 is attached on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position on the right side in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is molded of a nonconductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center of the top surface of the top plate 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is approximately one minute from the depth at which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonal to the left and back from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 and several times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B After extending so as to be depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left at a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, thereby forming a single guiding passage. It is done. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is in communication with the upper end opening of one guiding passage 570 a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the left end. It inclines so that the left end side becomes low at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed on substantially the same plane. It has become so. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is bent downward in a plurality according to the direction from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape. In addition, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the tank rail 553 at the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded to be opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from spreading or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball straightening member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is formed to be opaque white, and at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 The end on the side of one rail cover 554 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 94). The flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in two stages in the upper and lower directions is delayed by the rectifying pieces 556a, and the flow is rectified in the downstream side to flow in the tank rail 553 Even if the height is lowered, it does not clog the ball.

  The ball stopper 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque red color, and is mounted slidably in the left and right direction near the left end in the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553 By sliding it, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed so that the gaming ball B does not flow from the tank rail 553 to the delivery unit side downstream.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the downward direction from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in the shape of a step bent into a plurality. Among the portions formed in a plurality of bent steps, a partial region is formed as a substrate accommodating portion 551 aa to which the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 are attached. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered by a terminal cover 551k molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal board 558 has its mounting surface and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (in the present embodiment, the external terminals XCN1 arranged in a row from left to right as viewed from the rear of the discharge base unit 550) When the dispensing base 551 is viewed from the front, and the mounting surface thereof is vertically directed rearward of the dispensing base 551 so that the ten external terminals of XCN10 are exposed) It is attached to section 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 is horizontal with the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are provided) is mounted downward. As viewed from the front, the dispensing base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558 and attached to the substrate accommodation portion 551aa so as to be covered by the terminal cover 551k. For this reason, the frame ground substrate 559 is housed in the space formed by the substrate housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodation portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be viewed from the outside of the terminal cover 551k It has become.

  Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm). In contrast to this, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm). When the frame ground board 559 is accommodated and attached inside the board accommodation portion 551aa and the external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate accommodation portion 551aa, the frame ground board 559 is viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1 However, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground board 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 out of the lower side of the external terminal board 558 out of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame earth board 559 It can be viewed from the back of 1 (see, for example, FIG. 77). The ground terminal ECN 3 is 13.4 mm high as described above, and is high. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the ball rectifying member 556 hides and makes it difficult to view. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are as low as 7 mm as described above and can not project from the lower side of the external terminal board 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the presence of the external terminal board 558 hides it. It is difficult to see A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame ground substrate 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the payout unit]
The entire configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear is there. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the gaming ball B disposed under the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570 A payout device 580 for paying out one at a time based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B having passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in one row by the guiding path of the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 is provided with one payout passage 580a through which the gaming balls B supplied from the one lead passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 can flow and a single ball withdrawal from the middle of the payout passage 580a In the normal state, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released from the ball extraction passage 580b to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the gaming ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the gaming ball B discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, receives the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 and guides the gaming ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is to do.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-like guiding unit base 571 having a meanderingly extending guiding passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is opened forward, and a front side of the guiding unit base 571 closed. The game ball B in the guide passage 570a is detected by detecting the movement of the flat guide channel front lid 572 and the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a. And a ball-off detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of (see FIG. 94).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front cover 572 in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The induction passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the induction unit base 571 and extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the induction unit base 571 and then bends to the right It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the width of the unit base 571 and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

  The guiding passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front and rear right and the width in the right and left direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B in the distribution direction in which the gaming ball B is It can be guided in one row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the movable piece member 573 is mounted to be able to move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a near the top. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side in a front view of the guide passage 570a, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to be. In this movable piece member 573, when the gaming ball B is in contact with the portion projecting into the guiding passage 570a, the projecting portion is pushed by the gaming ball B and does not protrude backward from the inside of the guiding passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guiding passage 570a, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from inside the guiding passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the gaming ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non detection state when the gaming ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is a dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It is in communication with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B extends in a serpentine manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many gaming can be performed in the guiding passage 570a. The ball B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90 (a) is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extraction movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a) It is. FIG. 91 is a rear view of the payout device for illustrating the rotational position of the payout blade. FIG. 92 is a rear view of the dispenser for illustrating ball clogging and ball falling prevention. In addition, in order to demonstrate the rotation position of a delivery blade, FIG. 91 is making it a target of description while being able to visually recognize some delivery gear members and various gears which can not be visually recognized from the back of a delivery apparatus. A small circle is attached to the bottom portion of the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. Here, first, the configuration of the dispensing device 580 will be described, and then, the rotational position of the dispensing blade, ball clogging prevention and ball falling prevention will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of Dispensing Device]
Dispensing device 580 is removably attached to the underside of ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of back plate left portion 551e of dispensing base 551 of dispensing base unit 550 from the rear. The payout device 580 has a box-like opening in the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can be distributed and a payout device main body 581 having a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a It has a flat-plate-like dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-like dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device back lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded to be transparent. Therefore, the gaming balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a and the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 can be viewed from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear cover 582.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, and the rotating shaft is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. Spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached, and spur gear-shaped meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583 Gear-shaped second gear engaged with the first transmission gear 586 (the number of teeth Z 1: 20) and the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583 It extends outward from the delivery gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20) and the spur gear-like delivery gear 588a meshing with the second transmission gear 587 and the delivery gear 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) A discharge gear member 588 having a number of detection pieces 588b rotatably mounted between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device front cover 583 and a discharge between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device rear cover 582 Dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a integrally rotated with the gear member 588 and projecting into the dispensing passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 And a blade rotation detection sensor 590. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 to be step-driven. When the dispensing motor 584 is driven stepwise, the rotating shaft is stepwise rotated at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in the present embodiment) accordingly. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the delivery gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The discharge blade 589 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded to be opaque white.

  Furthermore, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects the gaming ball B, and after the payout device main body 581 and the payout device The ball extraction movable piece 592 mounted so as to be able to open and close the ball extraction passage 580b at a site branched from the ejection passage 580a by the lid 582 and the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be held at the position where the ball extraction passage 580b is closed. And a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser rear lid 582. The ball pullout movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded to be opaque white. The ball pulling lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded to be opaque red.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a plan view. The dispensing device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger in the front view right than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position near the left from the center in the lateral direction, and the downstream end is at a position near the right end in the lateral direction. It opens downward. Dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height from the upper end so as to move little by little leftward, and after bending slightly diagonally downward from the upper side, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589. Then, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B above the center of the dispensing blade 589, a gap slightly larger than the gaming ball B with the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 It extends downward in a circular arc concentric with the discharge blade 589 so as to be formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right of the rear view from the center of the discharge blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the payout detection sensor 591.

  The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches off at a portion bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side in a rear view to the lower end in the rear view of the bottom surface It opens downward near the left end. A ball clogging prevention portion 581r is projected in a rib shape toward the ball removal passage 580b with a portion of the inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a having a predetermined distance dimension at this branched portion, and the ball clogging prevention portion The upper surface 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a are formed in the same plane, and are inclined downward to the right in a rear view. A detailed description of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r will be described later.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball B A main body side guide wall 581a which protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap than the other, and which is formed to be continuous with the left side wall in a rear view of the discharge passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and are a back view of a portion extending to the right in a rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the dispensing device body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in a rear view. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 is provided with three detection pieces 588b in the shape of flat plates having an arc shape extending outward, at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device back cover 582. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape and extending concentrically outward from the rotation shaft in a plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending in the dispensing passage 580a from the upper side to the rotational axis and then extending to the right in the rear view. And protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. Dispensing blade 589 is provided with three ball pieces 589a, and a ball accommodating portion 589b which is recessed to the center side with an arc having a radius larger than the radius of gaming ball B, and is recessed with a circular arc in a cylindrical outer peripheral portion. By forming the spherical ball accommodating portions 589 b at equal intervals, three blade pieces 589 a serving as peaks and three ball accommodating portions 589 b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can regulate movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. Thus, the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially integrally rotatably mounted by the dispensing device rear lid 582 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left in the rear view of the rotation shaft of the delivery gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the discharge gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the discharge blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the back and forth direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces in the dispensing passage 580a. The depth of the ball removal movable piece 592 is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a Through the gap between the two, and may be projected into the ball removal passage 580b or retracted out of the ball removal passage 580b.

  The ball extracting lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear view left in the vicinity of the upper end of the ball extracting movable piece 592. A part of the ball extraction lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lowering end, the lower portion can be in contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580 b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. See 90). Thus, the ball can be removed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593.

  When the ball extraction is performed by raising the ball extraction lever 593 to turn the ball extraction movable piece 592 into a rotatable state, the gaming ball B, which is in a state like a beaded connection on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592 Will flow down the ball removal passage 580 b beyond the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the gaming ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the discharge passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is nothing like the payout wing 589 for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball B, so the gaming ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down too early.

  As described above, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the gaming ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball extraction passage 580b, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispenser main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispenser rear lid 582 Since the ball pullout movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball pullout passage 580b by the contact force since it can move to the outer side than the inner surface of the ball pullout passage 580b, the ball pullout movable piece 592 is The game ball B is not pinched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From such a thing, since it is possible to make the ball removal movable piece 592 hard to break, more gaming balls B can be discharged faster to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the ball extraction passage 580b passes between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a at intervals where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is narrower than the gaming ball B. In order to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, the game ball B is in contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b so that the ball removal movable piece 592 has a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B is moved to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, Only the game ball B can prevent outward movement by the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the gaming ball B to the outside is blocked between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the gaming ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball thereafter Since the movement of the pullout movable piece 592 is due to an inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pullout movable piece 592, and the ball pullout movable piece 592 can be made hard to break and the main body side guide The gaming ball B does not protrude to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the gaming ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7-2 b. Rotation position of the dispensing blade]
As described above, the payout device 580 has the spur gear drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, and the spur gear first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 ( Number of teeth Z1: 20), spur gear-like second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20) meshing with the first transmission gear 586, spur gear-like delivery gear 588a meshing with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth) Z3: 24), a delivery gear member 588 having a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a delivery blade 589 integrally rotating with the delivery gear member 588, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 for detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588; When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is driven to rotate, the rotation is discharged through the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotational speed of the delivery gear member 588 is obtained by reducing the rotational speed of the delivery motor 584 by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588. . The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 of the drive gear 585 (= 9) / the number of teeth Z3 of the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588 (= 24) according to a calculation by mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotary shaft rotating 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps to 360 degrees = 18 degrees x 20 steps)), the discharge blade 589 integrally rotated with the discharge gear member 588 is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees x speed reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. As a result, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and when it makes one rotation (360 degrees rotation), 4.5 It will rotate an extra degree.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees, so one rotation (360 degrees rotation) of the dispensing blade 589 is performed. Stepping drive to the dispensing motor 584 that corresponds to one rotation (360-degree rotation) of the dispensing blade 589 is required to rotate the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 step 53.333 ... (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees) The number of steps which is the number of times is not to be an integer.

  That is, in the present embodiment, three ball housing portions 589 b are formed at equal intervals in the discharge blade 589, and the rotary shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to step driving. The discharge blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the discharge gear 588a of the discharge gear member 588 (that is, the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is 1). When the step rotation (18 degrees rotation), the payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees), so the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B every rotation of 120 degrees, and the payout In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 17.777... Step rotation (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is set as the 18 step rotation which is an integer in which the decimal part is rounded up. By rotating 589 by more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees rotation (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), the rotational position of the payout wing 589 to the position where the next game ball B is received It is possible to rotate.

  Although the payout wing 589 can pay out three game balls B every one rotation (360 degrees rotation), there are also cases where only one ball pays out the game balls B. Since the blade rotation detection sensor 590 may erroneously detect the rotational position of the payout blade 589 due to, etc., the processing of setting the origin of the rotational position of the payout blade 589 should be performed each time one game ball B is dispensed. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotation which is an integer in which the decimal part is rounded up. The payout wing 589 is rotated over 120 degrees (in fact, it is 121.5 degrees rotation (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), and each time one game ball B is paid out, the payout is made. A process of setting the origin of the rotational position of the blade 589 is performed to enhance the accuracy of the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589.

  Further, since the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of the game ball B of one ball by the payout wing 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one ball is paid out for the game ball Even if the error is accumulated, the rotation angle of the dispensing blade 589 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation shaft of the dispensing blade 589, thereby making the gaming ball one ball The accumulated error can be reset each time the money is paid out. As a result, even if an error occurs every time the game ball is paid out due to the influence of the tobacco dust or the like, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time the game ball is paid out It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an error to occur in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends the gaming ball.

  Further, since the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of the game ball B of one ball by the payout wing 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one ball is paid out for the game ball The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, whereby the adhesion position of dust and dirt can be dispersed. Of course, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member that causes such a positioning error is set, although the error is accumulated, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is The plurality of detection pieces 588b of the delivery gear member 588 shown in FIG. 89, which are provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the delivery blade 589, are reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feeding rotary unit which receives and sends the game ball is changed each time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where dust and / or dust adheres are dispersed to the dust or the like. It is possible to have a strong dispensing device 580. As described above, the dispensing device 580 has one dispensing passage 580a. For this reason, when the payout speed of the game ball is made the same as compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages, the payout blades 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a in the present embodiment. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout wings 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout path 580a in the embodiment collide with the gaming balls and the payout wings 589 compared to the payout devices having the payout wings in the two payout paths. Since the number of times is doubled, there is a high probability that tobacco dust and dirt adhere to the discharge blade 589.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 54 steps, as described above, since the discharging blade 589 exceeds one rotation, 54 rotations of the rotating shaft of the discharging motor 584 are performed one rotation of the discharging blade 589. If control is performed to set and manage as a set, an angular difference of 4.5 degrees with respect to one rotation of the discharge blade 589 is produced each time the rotary shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates 54 steps, for example, 80 sets In this case, the angle difference is finally stacked up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls to pay out the game balls B is increased by three.

  As described above, the delivery gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120 degree areas including the 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and the 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588 b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control substrate 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control substrate 633 is based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-described angular difference does not occur, and the rotational position of the payout blade 589 rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588. The game ball B is a single ball by setting a 120 degree area having a 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed. It can be managed as an operation to pay out one by one.

  Specifically, first, in the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the delivery gear member 588, the region of 60 degrees where the detection piece 588b is formed blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. Because it is in the state, 9 steps rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the discharge blade 589 integrally rotating with the discharge gear member 588) as a light shielding range. The 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed is managed as 9 o'clock of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 as a light receiving range because the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. (It corresponds to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 integrally rotating with the dispensing gear member 588).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the delivery gear member 588 is detected with nine steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 with the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588 b is formed as the light blocking range. It is managed by 18 step rotation which united the 9 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 with the 60 degree area where the piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range, against the payout of one ball of the game ball B It is performed by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 18 steps.

  When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates nine steps, the discharge blade 589, which rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps), so the light shielding range is 60 degrees. Since the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can rotate a little larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, a 60 degree area (light shielding range) where the detection piece 588 b is formed, A 60-degree region (light receiving range) in which the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably determined.

  Here, a method of setting the origin of the delivery blade 589 integrally rotating with the delivery gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 91A, the payout control board 633 is in a state where the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 has shifted the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (“first edge Detection position) is set as the point A. At this point A, movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade 589a of the payout blade 589.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotational shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by 5 steps from the point A as the origin, as shown in FIG. 91 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589 b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotational shaft of the dispensing motor 584 four steps from the origin as a point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as "second edge detection state"). In a region where the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, which rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, from point A to the origin and then point B, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the light receiving range (that is, the discharge gear described above) Of the 120 degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, a 60 degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed is obtained.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 nine steps from the point B as the above-mentioned A point. At this time, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589 b of the payout blade 589 is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580 a at the origin. In a region where the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, which rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, from point B to point A, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the light shielding range (that is, the discharge gear member 588 described above). In the area of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, the area of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588 b is formed).

  Here, the control of the dispensing device 580 by the dispensing control substrate 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control-side power-on process upon power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (temporary power failure occurs momentary power failure). The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady process when the initialization setting process and the interrupt start setting are performed in the process on power-on at the payout control side. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after setting the interrupt start, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processing such as payout motor control processing, history creation processing, origin setting processing and the like in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt processing.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation having a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the history creation processing to check the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms. The payout control board 633 performs switching of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms, that is, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed respectively this time and last time. The result of checking whether the detection axis 588 b is in the blocking state or in the non-blocking state is one of the least significant bits of the history information having a width of 8 bits. After bit shift toward the bit one by one, when the detection result of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 cuts off the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when the detection result of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is in the state in which the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, When the result of the check is different from that of the current (for example, one of the result of the present and the previous check is when the detection piece 588 b is blocking the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the blade rotation detection sensor When the detection piece 588b is in a non-blocking state) of the optical axis 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  As described above, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms of switching the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation in the history creation processing. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process of setting the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 as the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. As described above, the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A. Since the rotational position of the discharge blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is positioned in the 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b described above is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 It will be in the state which 588b does not interrupt.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588 b is a blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is positioned at point A. 00000001B ("B" indicates that it is bit information. The same applies hereinafter.) Is set because it becomes a state (first edge detection state) in which the optical axis of is shifted from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. . Then, when the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, 00111111B is set to the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs a first mask process on the history information with a first determination value of 11110000 B, thereby extracting data from 8 times before to 5 times before from history information as an operation result. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000 B by the first mask process), and the second judgment process of 00010000 B is further subjected to the second mask process to the extracted data, thereby obtaining the data five times before the history information. The data is taken out as the operation result (here, the operation result is 00010000 by the second mask process) If the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not set as the origin. It is determined that the current rotational position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is set as the origin.

  When the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the rotational axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is at the origin. Then, the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is B point, and the rotational shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the B point The present process is terminated as it is in a total of 13 step rotations in which the rotational position of the discharge blade 589 is again set to the A point. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the time until the rotational shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps in total has elapsed. A home position detection prohibiting time for prohibiting the home position setting for the delivery blade 589 is provided.

  The payout control board 633 switches the excitation of the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing the payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 91, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at point A, and sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin. The time for setting is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 steps rotation), and the rotational position of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the origin. The time for setting the point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point B The time to again set the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, which becomes the light receiving range again, to the point A, is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 steps rotation). As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by the 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the time taken for the game ball B to pay one is the payout By performing 18 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 584, 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 steps of rotation) is obtained.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a payout device for dispensing the game balls according to the amount of rotation of the payout rotating body by receiving the game balls and driving the game balls by driving the payout motor (e.g. Open 2004-041261 (paragraphs [0052] and FIG. 4)). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the output of data drive data for four steps to pay out one game ball. ing. In a pachinko machine installed in a pachinko parlor, it is impossible to avoid that the tobacco dust or the like attached to the gaming balls adheres to the inside of the payout device. In addition, since the dispensation device is not disassembled and cleaned, there is a demand for a dispensation device that is strong against cigarette dust, dust, and the like. By the way, in the gaming machine of this reference, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the driving of 4 steps of the payout motor to pay out one game ball, so accurate operation can be expected. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotary body is the same each time. For this reason, there is a problem that the position where the cigarette dust and the dust adhere is also fixed and it is easy to be deposited.

[4-7-2 c. Ball clogging prevention and ball falling prevention]
Next, ball clogging prevention and ball falling prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, ball clogging prevention at the time of ball removal will be described first, and subsequently, ball falling prevention by the non-energized state of the dispensing motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, the ball extraction lever 593 can turn the ball extraction movable piece 592 to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened. It can be done. When ball removal is performed, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to bring the ball removal movable piece 592 into a rotatable state. At this time, in a state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), a part of the inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a Is a predetermined distance dimension, and a total of four gaming balls B are parked up to the rib-like ball clogging prevention portion 581 r protruding toward the ball removal passage 580 b. As this predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the gaming ball B retained on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention portion 581 r is on the right side from the left end side of the ball jam prevention portion 581 r and downstream (in other words, the discharge blade 589 is present) (The downstream side of the delivery passage 580a). Thus, a rib-like ball clogging prevention portion in which a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589 and protrudes toward the ball removing passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B are parked in the payout passage 580a until 581r, a part of the last game ball B to be parked is pushed out toward the ball evacuation path 580b in the ball jam prevention portion 581r. That is, as the predetermined distance dimension, the gaming ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is held on the upper surface of the ball clogging preventing portion 581r, and is formed to constitute the side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the back lid side guide wall 582a as mentioned above collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) parked on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention portion 581r Even in this case, it has a length capable of flowing down to the ball removal passage 580b. In this manner, a portion of the gaming ball B (that is, the last gaming ball B) on the upper surface of the clogging prevention portion 581r stays in a state of protruding toward the ball pulling passage 580b (in other words, clogging prevention) A part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the section 581r is restricted by the length that one ball of game ball B can flow down as the width of the ball removal passage 580b) It can be done.

  Further, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581 r has the upper surface thereof and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580 a formed in the same plane, and is a downward slope to the right in a rear view.

  That is, in the case where the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention portion 581r, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout path 580a However, even if it collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r, the upper surface of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r is a downward sloping surface in rear view The center (center of gravity) position of the gaming ball B (that is, the last gaming ball B) staying on the upper surface of the clogging prevention portion 581 r is located on the right side and downstream of the left end side of the clogging prevention portion 581 r Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581 r from being pushed by the collision and flowing down toward the ball extraction passage 580 b. Be able to Going on. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from being clogged in the vicinity of the left end of the ball jam prevention portion 581r.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r is a ball removal path (a main ball guide wall 581 a and a rear lid side guide wall 582 a along the ball extraction passage 580 b The flow path of the game ball B on the flow path to the side is restricted to the width where one game ball B can flow down as the width of the ball extraction passage 580b as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. This can prevent ball clogging. Therefore, ball clogging at the time of ball removal can be reliably prevented. In the present embodiment, although the width of the ball extraction passage 580b varies depending on the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, the width is set so as to be from 12 mm to 14 mm. It is set to 13 mm in the state where the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging easily occurs at a place where the width of each passage is narrowed from a place larger than twice the diameter (11 mm) of the gaming ball to a little smaller than twice the diameter of the gaming ball (for example 21 mm).

  Next, ball fall prevention by the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described. In the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. As a result, the game ball B is in a state of being held in the payout passage 580a in a state in which the subsequent game balls B are in contact with the game balls B by beading. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589 b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the dispensing passage 580a obliquely extends downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end, and slightly rightward from there After being bent diagonally downward, it bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward approximately vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589.

  Therefore, the center (center of gravity) position of the gaming ball B in contact with the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589 b of the payout wing 589 is the center of the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589 b of the payout wing 589 It will be shifted slightly to the left compared with the center of gravity position, and it will follow the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 in a state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin. A rightward force (i.e., a force rotating clockwise) acts on the central axis of rotation of the payout blade 589 due to the ball pressure of the game ball B due to its own weight.

  In such a state, when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. The gaming ball B will flow down (sent out) to the downstream side of the payout path 580a, and ball drop will occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is of the dispensing blade 589 even if it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589. The shape of the dispensing passage 580a on the right side of the dispensing blade 589 is formed in the rear view so as to be able to be stopped by six steps of rotation from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 92 (b) and 92 (c), when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stops. In the above, the game ball B in contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 abuts on the side wall of the payout passage 580a and the outer periphery of the blade piece 589a having the arc shape of the payout blade 589 Of the faces, the ball accommodating portion 589b is closer to the gaming ball B is accommodated (in other words, the ball accommodating portion 589b accommodating the gaming ball B, and the ball accommodating portion 589b and the following ball accommodating balls B are not accommodated) Of the outer peripheral surface of the wing piece 589a connecting the portion 589b, from the center of this outer peripheral surface, by leaning on the point S2 which is in contact with the ball accommodating portion 589b side where the gaming ball B is accommodated) The shape of the dispensing passage 580a is formed on. As a result, a ball pressure can be generated to press the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the dispensing blade 589, and the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can be rotated six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  When the dispensing control board 633 starts controlling the dispensing motor 584 in a state where the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and is stopped, it rotates 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 91 (d), it has been rotated by two steps out of the light shielding range (9 steps) beyond point B, which has been rotated by four steps from the origin and advanced. However, when the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps (shown in FIG. 91 (d), the remaining 7 steps of rotation + 5 steps of rotation from point A to proceed to rotate 2 steps out of 9 steps) The game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b of the discharge blade 589 flows downstream (is sent out) to the downstream side of the discharge passage 580a, and the discharge inspection is performed. It is adapted to be reliably detected by the sensor 591. Therefore, even in the state where the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (in a six-step rotation) and stopped, an excessive number of balls for which the gaming ball B is dispensed is not generated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 is a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Accordingly, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the instructed number of gaming balls B to the player side (the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202). At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (a momentary power failure occurs momentarily), the dispensing motor 584 is controlled so as not to return the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 to the origin. As described above, this causes the gaming ball B to generate an excessive number of balls to be paid out in a state where the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 and rotated (six steps to advance). To prevent that.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is to be emitted downward from the payout device 580 and guide the gaming ball B to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-like upper full tank base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened at the rear side, and a box shape attached at the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the open front And a dispenser pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the top full-tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispenser 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601 a for attaching a back cover.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 600 is an upper discharge that opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side to a position about 2/3 the height from the lower side. It is in communication with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper discharging ball receiving passage 600a and extends about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the full height An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper normal discharge passage 600c An upper full tank delivery passage 600d extending downward from the front right side from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the upper surface And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 94).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank passage unit 600, the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left in front view. The upper full ball passage unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the gaming ball B released (disbursed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d It is discharged downward from any of the The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate 551 g of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550 and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball channel unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full-tan ball passage unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank passage unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. And a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward at the front end of the lower full tank base 611, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 which can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end opening of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b And a closing spring 614 which is biased.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view In the state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b extend forward in a side-by-side manner, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. The lower full tank delivery passage 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal delivery passage 610a. The lower ball removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the longitudinal direction.

  The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise as viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, the front end openings (downstream end) of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. Opening is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an operating protrusion 613 a protruding forward. The actuating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a front view, and as the front end face approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction It is inclined to project forward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a is formed to abut on the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the wafer cover unit 150 in the door frame 3.

  In the lower full tank unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are opened upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are assembled to the upper It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue passage unit 600. Thereby, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is the lower full payout passage 610b. , And the game balls B discharged downward from the upper ball-opening passage 600e flow in the lower ball-opening passage 610c.

  Further, when the lower full-tank passage unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal delivery passage 610 a and the lower full delivery passage 610 b pass through the fal cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is opened immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receptacle 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610 c is opened to face the ball removal guiding portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in the normal state (the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the actuating projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing of the fal cover unit 150. By being in contact with the portion 150f, the plate is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. Thus, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are opened, and are communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving hole 150b of the far cover unit 150. It is in the state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the far cover unit 150 Is turned clockwise in a front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the gaming balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can not move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of gaming balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lowering end, and the ball pulling passage 580 b branched from the discharging passage 580 a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

  A predetermined number of ball tanks 552, which are open upwards, are detected from the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The gaming balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 through the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 in a state of being aligned by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the gaming ball B can not move (flow downward) downstream of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of gaming balls B stagnate upstream of the payout blade 589 It becomes.

  Then, the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball breakage detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the gaming ball B is stored in the passage from at least the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the dispensing blade 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the dispensing motor 584, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a It is released downstream of 589. Then, the gaming balls B discharged from the dispensing blade 589 (the ball accommodating portion 589 b) are sent to the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600 after being detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591.

  The gaming ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passing unit 600 is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. Then, the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600 c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610 a of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate-ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 in the case of FIG.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 becomes full with the game balls B, the game balls B can not be released forward from the upper ball feed opening 211a, so the payout device When the game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal discharge passage 610a of the lower full tank passage unit 610 and the game ball B is further discharged, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the communicating upper full ball passage unit 600. Then, when the gaming ball B is further dispensed in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the gaming balls B, the upper normal ball storage passage 600b communicated on the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is stored. The gaming ball B starts to stagnate, and the gaming ball B starts to flow to the upper full payout path 600d side adjacent to the upper regular payout path 600c.

  Then, the gaming ball B that has flowed down to the upper full discharge passage 600 d passes through the lower full discharge passage 610 b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and fills the full ball receptacle 150 b in the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Received by Thereafter, the gaming balls B received in the full tank receptacle 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. As a result, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The gaming ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full with gaming balls B (( The player is informed that the container is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected.

  When discharging the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descent end Slide it to the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a , And is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, in the region of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581 a and the rear lid side guide wall 582 a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592. Is less likely to break.

  The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, the ball ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 pass through the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 Discharged to the island facilities side of

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the bottom rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 99 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The base unit 620 is a main unit frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a and the speaker unit 620a attached to the lower side than the game board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main unit frame base 501 in the main unit frame base unit 500. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the front end of the speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501. And a container-like speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker attachment portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view and extending in the vertical direction, and a front surface of the speaker attachment portion 621a A space front recess 621b recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side and a space protruding downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extending in the lateral direction and directed diagonally backward And an open connection portion 621c.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 . The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container opened forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most greatly, and is stepped backward in a step-like manner toward the right in front view. It is formed so that the protrusion of. As a result, a space on the rear side to the right of the center in the front view of the speaker box 623 can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620 b, the power supply unit 620 c, and the like can be disposed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621 c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has the space front concave portion 621b which bulges forward in the front view right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the enclosure 624 protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 goes to the right The space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is secured sufficiently wide even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount.

  In the speaker unit 620 a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylindrical portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48. And the inner space 40a of the outer plate 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, a large space enclosure 624 can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front plate 42 and the rear plate 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622 The sound that has been output can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space (a part of the enclosure 624) behind the main body frame speaker 622 is extended to the right in front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made with the outer frame lower assembly 40 through the connection tube portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound outputted from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. The sound can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted low frequency band can be resonated and amplified by passing the two port members 47 and can be emitted forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-reversed state, and therefore, it is outputted from the front of the main frame speaker 622 to be a dish unit The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the aperture of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which heavy bass sounds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass. Thus, a sound emitted from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211 b of the dish unit 200 and a sound emitted from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 Allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through cylinder 623a which extends in a cylindrical shape and communicates with the through hole 621d is formed. In the assembled state of the speaker unit 620 a, the through hole 621 d and the through cylinder 623 a communicate with each other, and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620 b of the board unit 620 is attached to the front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620 c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full-tank passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 guiding rightward and a discharge ball receiving portion receiving the gaming ball B which is opened upward on the right side in a front view on the downstream side of the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and which is discharged downward from the game board 5 628, and a ball outlet 629 for discharging the gaming ball B which has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharging ball receiver 628 downward.

  The upstream end of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 is opened leftward in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and the downstream end is opened on the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610 The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends in the left and right direction. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 at the left end in a front view, and is inclined so as to be lower toward the right side.

  The base unit 620b guides the game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628, Since the sheet is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, the space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction can be easily secured widely in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be enlarged, and the player can hear sounds with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

  The power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 includes a power supply substrate 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply substrate cover attached to the rear base 626 to cover the rear side of the power supply substrate 630. And 631. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 volts (AC 100 V) is stepped down to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of AC 24 volts (AC 24 V). The AC 24 V that is stepped down in the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply substrate 630 via a power supply wiring (not shown). The power supply substrate 630 prepares various power supplies (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from AC 24 V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies the various substrates.

  The dispensing control unit 620d includes a box-like dispensing control substrate box 632 detachably mounted on the rear side of the power supply substrate cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control substrate 633 housed in the dispensing control substrate box 632 (see FIG. See 99) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 according to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Then, the game balls B of the instructed number are to be paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202).

  The delivery control board box 632 is composed of a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. A payout control board 633 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. By forming the cover body and the beta body transparently by using a polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side or the back side of the payout control substrate 633 (whether or not the illegal modification is performed, or the illegal IC is mounted Can be confirmed from the outside of the delivery control board box 632). Further, the dispensing control substrate box 632 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body respectively. When the dispensing control substrate box 632 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the dispensing is performed next. In order to open the control substrate box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the dispensing control substrate box 632. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632 and the deterrence against the fraudulent act on the dispensing control board box 632 is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620 e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620 a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. And an interface substrate cover 636 attached to the substrate base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to the rearmost portion of the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 on the rear surface of the speaker box 623. The interface board 635 is connected to an end of one (the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface substrate 635 is connected to a power supply substrate 630, a payout control substrate 633, a main control substrate, a peripheral control substrate, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface substrate cover 636 extends to the right in a front view more than the substrate base 634 (interface substrate 635) so as to cover a part of the dispensing control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion slot 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end of the rear extension of the rear extension 501 j of the main body frame base 501 on the right side in a front view, and the left side is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600. When the left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball passage unit 600, the back side is formed on the upper side of the back cover 640

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and an abutting portion 640 a which is lowered one step forward on the upper side is formed. When assembled in the frame 4, the rear surface is formed to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 (the rear surface of the ridge portion 551da formed on the above-described back plate upper portion 551d) There is. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. , And is covered by a ridge portion 551da which is formed to protrude from the back plate upper portion 551d.

  The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating vertically and longitudinally, except for the contact portion 640a. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 4 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 100 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 projecting forward from the unit base 651. A door frame wedge 652, a plurality of outer frame wedges 653 projecting backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and forward projecting from the lower end of the front end of the unit base 651 And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the locking unit 650 biases the door frame collar 652 downward and the outer frame collar 653 upward as compared to the lock spring 655 and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. And an outer frame unlocking lever 656 for moving the outer frame collar 653 downward by protruding forward from the upper position and sliding it downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of door frame ridges 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward of the front surface of the main frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, whereby the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The transmission member 133 is engaged, and rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame wedges 652 are locked to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) The frame collar 653 is locked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, inserts a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130, and when rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, a plurality of transmission cylinders 654 The door frame wedge 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame wedges 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame weirs 653 move downward, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip end sides of the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 108. FIG. 101 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in (a). FIG. 102 is an enlarged view showing the upper portion of the main body frame in a rear perspective view. FIG. 103 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state in which a tank rail and the like are assembled in a ball tank, and FIG. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 103 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 105 is an explanatory view showing a region where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame are distributed. FIG. 106 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 108 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 is insertable into the outer frame 2 by the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, and the rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped attached along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main frame base 501 A dispensing base 551 and a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container form) extending to the left and right, attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward The tank rail 553 extending to the left in the form of a groove, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554 A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the rail 553; a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the lens 553 and a payout device 580 mounted on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 and for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player And.

  The ball tank 552 is formed into a rectangular shape having a plan view shape extending in the left-right direction, and is inclined from the front side and the rear side of the bottom wall 552a which is inclined so that the left side is low in front view. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container whose upper side is open. It is done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552 f is about 3⁄4 the length of the front wall 552 b in the left-right direction from the end side of the left wall 552 d to the end of the opposite side (right wall 552 e side) in the front wall 552 b. It is formed over the ridge.

  The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 at the right end side (upstream side) in front view, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552 . The tank rail 553 extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom portion, and has a bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined to be lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view It has a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction and moves parallel to the axis extending from the right end to the left end so as to move backward toward the end .

  In the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a portion extending parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right, extending to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail at the upper end of this portion With the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 attached, the upper side is closed. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the gaming ball B at the downstream end Is formed at a height allowing only one flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction (in this embodiment, about the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a in a bowl shape and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a in front view) Three rectangular cutouts 553aa each having a length of 30 mm are formed at a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in the present embodiment). Approximately 7 mm obtained by adding a thickness (about 2.5 mm in the present embodiment) to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a from the back wall of the main guiding portion 553a to the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a by the rectangular notch 553aa A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a (in this embodiment) A rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed by adding about 2.5 mm), and these rectangular holes are formed in communication with each other.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 are dropped by peeling metal powder from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the gaming ball B is in a state of adhering to the main induction portion 553a, the flow of the gaming ball B in the downstream direction is impeded, and the gaming ball B is smoothly directed toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and metal powder generated due to the wear of the gaming ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main induction portion 553a by naturally falling from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Due to the vibration of the gaming ball B rolling on the main guiding portion 553a, metal powder produced by the wear of the gaming ball B adhering to the main guiding portion 553a falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa The metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the notch portion 553aa by a staff member such as a game hall clerk, resulting from wear of the game ball B adhering to the main induction portion 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a by removing the metal powder.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the plurality of gaming balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the gaming balls B A bulging portion 553b which is bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a There is. The plurality of gaming balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned by the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes to the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower as it goes from the upper end side to the main guiding portion 553a below. Because of this, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of gaming balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. In the bulging portion 553b, the center of the curved curvature is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b is slightly Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curvature thereof is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Because of this, in the gaming ball B that circulates the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts is in accordance with the position of the bulging portion 553b that contacts. It will change in various directions, and can suppress generation | occurrence | production of a ball | bowl on the inside of the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a constant extending shape, a reaction force always acts on the gaming ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction. Because it becomes difficult to disperse the reaction force, it is difficult for the game ball B to escape by always pressing the internal game ball B in a fixed direction, and it becomes easy to generate a ball clog (ball seam). On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b becomes different depending on the position of the game ball B, so the inside is circulated By dispersing the pressed directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and it is possible to make it difficult to generate a ball clog (ball game).

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured to be able to visually recognize the inside from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball seam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be viewed from the outside, so a ball clogged location can be identified quickly. can do. Therefore, since clogging in the tank rail 553 can be eliminated quickly, interruption of the game due to the occurrence of clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible for the player to enjoy the game by interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, it is possible to visually recognize the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 through the tank rail 553 from behind. When a movable malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit etc., with the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4, the status of the drive motor, transmission mechanism such as gear or belt, etc. can be checked, and the phase described above The same effect as that of the use effect can be achieved.

  The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction is outside the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return to the ball tank 552 the gaming ball B which extends to the left (left) and overflows from the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side. And the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is low, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 is A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 out of both the left and right sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter Provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the side opposite to the detour passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 opened at the upper side than the upper portion is open Covers the upper side of an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a which can be connected with electric wiring from the rear, and a plurality of the wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflowing surface portion 501m is a flat plate from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically to the rear from a position low by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B It is extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about 1/2 the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball B. In this overflow surface portion 501m, in a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between it and the outer frame upper member 30. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m; The upper end of the left step 501n and the right step 501o is higher than the left step 501n and the right step 501o in the left and right direction, and the upper end extends in the front and back direction in a band plate shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals smaller than the diameter. The left step portion 501 n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501 n is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. A gap between the two is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the left step coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o coincides with the right wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

  The bypass passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left wall 552d, and the right wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left from the outside, and is a passage surface 552h inclined such that the front end has the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. And a ridge portion extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552 d in the passage surface 552 h to the same height as the left side wall 552 d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side (the collar 552i side) of the rear end side It extends diagonally to move forward as it goes from the to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left and right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left and right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the gaming ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552 g changes from the rear end, which is oblique, so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the bypass passage 552 g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553. The game ball B from can be received. In addition, since game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the tank rail by the game balls B from the bypass passage 552 g It is possible to make it difficult to cause ball clogging in 553.

  The detour passage 552 g extends obliquely with respect to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves rearward as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 is reached, so the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 side. At the time of discharge, the obliquely extending rear end allows the gaming ball B to be discharged to the upstream side which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed, and the width It is possible to suppress the generation of the ball seam in the tank rail 553 by releasing it to the wide area of

  Further, in the tank rail 553, a portion for guiding the gaming ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the rear side 552c in a front view. In this part, the gaming ball B which has descended from the inside of the ball tank 552 below the guide surface 552 j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552 k) is distributed. Because of this, the height of the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553 in the portion behind the detour passage 552 g in the tank rail 553 Never exceed height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant) where game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. Thus, the game balls B induced to the rear side can be reliably received by the tank rails 553, and the game balls B will not spill backward from the tank rails 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate extending in the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d so as to be lower from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552 j of The guide surface portion 552 j extends from the front wall 552 b to the rear wall 552 c in the front-rear direction. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j has a right end side from the left end of the front wall 552 b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552 b in the left and right direction in front view After being obliquely extended to about 1/9 of the total length from the front wall 552b to about one half of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in parallel to the rear wall 552c, extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction.

  The ball tank 552 is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape in plan view and the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed region has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat flange extending in the lateral direction outward and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the flange portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 551l. The ball tank 552 has the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l have the height of the left end wall 552d or the upper end edge of the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501 Of the left step portion 501 n and the right step portion 501 o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552 k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side are positioned behind the ball tank 552 )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge unit 551 j is formed on the top surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551 j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be lowered stepwise backward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552 a of the ball tank 552 when assembled in the main frame 4. A position where the top of the tank rail 553 is higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction) It extends to the near side and then extends backward.

  The external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface with the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a aligned in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal which can hold the tip of the electric wiring by opening the holding portion by the operation of the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in an assembled state in the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the top surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, in the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g, as shown by white arrows in FIG. 105, the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower at the rear end side. The left step 501 n is inclined so that the rear right corner is lower, and the right step 501 o is lower so that the rear left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side is lower in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552 a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of gaming balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the overflowing portion 552 f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper end edges is exceeded It can be made to flow out to the outside (forward) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501m and made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 106). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress that the game balls B strongly push each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called, ball seam) due to engagement between the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 107, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back pressure from acting strongly on the game ball B in the ball tank 552 by the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m, and clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 Can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m may spill out on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a problem that the game ball B spilled to the outside of the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 can not be opened or closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, since the height of the upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thus, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m is the left side of one side of the ball tank 552 By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the return from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the gaming ball B on the bypass passage 552g side presses the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 to hold the ball It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the gaming ball B rolls on the bypass passage 552g) Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent the inflow of gaming balls B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g, the flow of the gaming balls B in the bypass passage 552g is behind the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side The flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side can be made, and the pressure of the gaming ball B guided from the bypass passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be made in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the gaming balls B are separated, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming balls B from pushing and biting each other, and the clogging of the gaming balls B is generated. It can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the gaming balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned since they are lined up, the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided at a portion of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side, the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a Since the change is made to coincide with each other, the plurality of gaming balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, the upper part of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the channel through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The number of steps in the height direction is reduced by circulating the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in multiple steps in the height direction in the lower direction through the portion of the tank rail 553 which is closed on the upper side, thereby reducing the number of steps in the height direction Can be aligned to Therefore, the plurality of gaming balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in one row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of gaming balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Thus, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more gaming balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected on the opposite side to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or vigorously supplies in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a etc. There is no occurrence of a short circuit or an electrical wiring disconnection due to the contact of the game ball B.

  The game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552 since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, it is difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, and it is difficult to drop from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such problems.

  Further, the gaming ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guiding surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 106) of the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the guiding surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface 552 j can be prevented from pressing in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 106, due to their inclination, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, and a problem occurs because the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B circulates from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface 552 j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant) where game balls B can be stacked upward. The gaming ball B induced by the bypass passage 552 g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are disposed in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 closed on the upper side, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 to cause a problem.

  The ball tank 552 is molded of a conductive resin, while the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded of a nonconductive resin. In this embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, the same polarity is obtained. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 is the peripheral control board box of the same polarity. It is repelled so that it can not be drawn to the peripheral control board box.

[4-12. Configuration of metal powder measures]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit caused by the metal powder of the game ball B which has dropped from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notched portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main induction portion 553a of the tank rail 553 The configuration of the metal powder countermeasure capable of avoiding the) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is an enlarged view of a part of a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-C in FIG. 101 (a), and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure. In FIG. 109, the outline of the game board 5 is indicated by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for the description is shown as a cross-sectional view.

  When metal powder (foreign substance) of the game ball B falling from the notched portion 553aa formed in a plurality of bowl-shaped main induction portions 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble occurs to cause a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500 or a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, a ROM, an SDRAM, etc. described later, and the peripheral data ROM substrate described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, and the spacing between the various connectors becomes narrower. Since the distance between the connector and the special connector is also narrow, it is necessary to take measures against the electrical trouble caused by the foreign matter dropped from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main induction portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 It shifts toward the back compared with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (in the present embodiment, about half the diameter of the gaming ball B It is arranged by the distance dimension of.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in which the tank rail 553 is disposed goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a It is formed in the shape of a step bent downwards in a plurality according to the direction. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are substantially coplanar. It is supposed to be deployed. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the contact is such that the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. The contact portion is covered by a convex portion 551da which is formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is received and attached at the top plate portion 551a or received and attached at the convex portion 551da. It can be done. Furthermore, the contacting portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 are in contact with each other protrudes backward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Because it is covered by the formed convex portion 551da, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa abuts. Of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502 It has become.

  Thus, the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and the back plate upper portion 551d are the metal of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The powder is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It acts as a whistle that can be done. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached is misaligned (in the present embodiment, displaced by a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the gaming ball B) Trouble (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed immediately below the notch 553aa), the electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 Is effective in preventing metal powder.

  Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), whereas the upper side, left side, and the side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) are provided. The metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later) because it is not provided on each side wall of the cover provided on the lower side and the right side. However, it is possible to make it difficult to intrude into the inside of the cover 1501.

  Further, the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed at the center side with a later described fan attachment recess having a square shape for attaching the air cooling fan FAN and a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom of the fan attachment recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along the respective lines. Further, along the lower side of the cover body 1501, seven connector holes provided at the peripheral control substrate 1510 attached to the inner side of the cover body 1501, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switches, Volume control holes are respectively formed, and two connector holes are respectively formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In the state where the peripheral control substrate 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover 1501. While seven connectors provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 are exposed from seven connector holes, gaps are formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed on the cover 1501, The volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. In a state where a liquid crystal output substrate described later is attached to the inside of the cover 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate and the two connector holes formed in the cover 1501, The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate are respectively exposed from these two connector holes.

  When the wing of the air-cooling fan attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation, thereby performing peripheral control. A plurality of air from the outside of the unit 1500, through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover 1501, and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. , The gap formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the seven connector holes formed on the cover 1501, the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the cover Volume adjustment holes formed in the body 1501 During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The total area of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom of the fan attachment recess of the cover 1501 (total area) is the area of the vent 1501az formed on the cover 1501 and the above Clearance (seven connectors provided on peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed on cover 1501; gaps formed on peripheral control board 1510; volume control switch provided on peripheral control board 1510; and formed on cover 1501 Than a volume adjustment hole, a gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate, and an area in two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output substrate and a gap formed in two connector holes formed in the cover 1501) It is getting smaller. Therefore, when the wing of the air cooling fan attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. A plurality of vents 1501az formed in the cover 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a plurality of vents 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the vent holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be reduced to a small value when taking in. As a result, it is possible to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B from invading the inner space of the cover 1501 through the vent holes 1501az under the influence of the flow of air.

  Incidentally, when the wing of the air cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked toward the inner space of the cover 1501 through the wing by this rotation. Because the flow velocity of the air by the rotation of the wing of the wing increases, the probability that the heavy powder of metal powder of the game ball B is sucked toward the inner space of the cover 1501 under the influence of the flow of air increases and sucks An electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by metal powder causes defects (faults) in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 attached to the inside of the cover 1501 and various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protrusion along the upper side of the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is air cooled. The game ball can be configured to have a function as a weir to prevent it from being sucked into the fan FAN, and by forming a protrusion along the upper side of the fan attachment recess formed in the cover body 1501, the gaming ball It can be configured to have a function as a weir that prevents heavy powder called metal powder of B from being drawn into the air cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN is a thin type Is selected (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN compared to the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess When the air-cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the fan attachment recess formed in the cover 1501 by selecting one having a short distance dimension), the inner wall of the FAN attachment recess allows the heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B to be the air-cooling fan It can be configured to have a function as a weir that prevents it from being sucked into the FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder can be taken such that an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B can be avoided The following is a description with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113). FIG. 110 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 111 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 113 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment. 110 to 113, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 109 (hereinafter, referred to as "the configuration of the metal powder measure according to the first embodiment") have the same reference numerals. The outline of the game board 5 is indicated by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for the explanation is shown as a cross-sectional view.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is formed in the shape of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-like main guiding portion 553a formed on the top plate 551a and is directed upward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension about one half of the diameter of the gaming ball B). That is, the end face of the bent top plate 551a is disposed above the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same plane. The rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 disposed substantially on the same plane as the tank rail 553 is branched from the portion to which the effect display device 1600 is attached and extended rearward.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 The contact recess 3010da is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, and the contacting portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail While the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed on substantially the same plane, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top panel 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment. The upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553 while the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, and the back box of the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back unit 3000. The difference is that rear surface 3010d of 3010 is disposed substantially on the same plane. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the mounting recess is formed on the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 in the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4. In the state of being in contact with the surface 3010 da, the abutted portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010 da. It is different at the point.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of gaming balls B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received at the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, the contacting portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in contact with each other is the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da Because it is covered, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a via the notch 553aa abuts It can not be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010).

  Thus, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the back surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 fall from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Towards the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) It functions as a weir that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is formed in the shape of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is closer to the back surface of the tank rail 553 The main guiding portion 553a is disposed so as to protrude below the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 And in contact with the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed on the upper surface, and the upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank And are arranged in the same plane.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment while the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same surface. The top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are substantially coplanar. It differs in that it is placed in Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is bent below the tank rail 553 The contact portion 6 is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a and in contact with the upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of gaming balls B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is a bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the contact portion 640 a of the back cover 640 can be received and attached. Furthermore, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other. As a result, the gap is not formed, so from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa comes in contact with the game panel of the game board 5 The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502 can not fall It is supposed to be.

  As described above, the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It acts as a trap that can be prevented. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is formed in the shape of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward of the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a extends rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553 It is arranged to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the gaming ball B).

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551 a disposed in contact is in contact with a convex portion 551 ab which is formed to project downward and is in contact with the tank rail 553. It is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same surface. The top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed so as to slightly protrude rearward as compared with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is disposed below the tank rail 553. The back surface of the top plate portion 551a is in a state of being in contact with a convex portion 551ab that is formed so as to project downward and is in a state of being in contact with the convex portion 551ab. Disposed below the tank rails 553, it is different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is disposed below the tank rail 553 and is a bent top plate portion It can be received and attached at 551a. Further, a front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 and a convex portion 551 ab disposed downward of the tank rail 553 and projecting downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551 a, Since the abutted portion where the surface contacts is in contact is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, it falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the played game ball B abuts It can not be dropped toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As described above, the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Metal powder falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) Functions as a pot that can prevent the ball and also functions as a receptacle for metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a that functions as a weir disposed below the tank rail 553 is a separate member (another structural component) and the top plate portion 551a. It can also be configured to attach to

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is formed in the shape of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed as described above, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d And are arranged substantially on the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed on the top plate 551a, and is directed downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension about one half of the diameter of the gaming ball B). That is, the end face of the bent top plate 551a is arranged to project downward as compared with the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the contact portion formed by the upper side of the back cover 640 being largely bent forward when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 The front surface of the 640 a is disposed parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553 a and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate 551 a which is disposed to project downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553 a. It is in a state of contact.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 While being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate 551a disposed parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and projecting downward as compared to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a, The portions in contact with the main guiding portion 553a are disposed largely out in front of the notched portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, while the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same surface. Abutment where the bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553 and the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent toward the front in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 The difference is that the portion 640a is disposed. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the front wall of the main guide portion 553a having a hook shape. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of top plate 551a which is disposed in parallel and which protrudes downward as compared to the bottom of main guiding portion 553a, and this abuts Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of gaming balls B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 disposed below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a which is formed by being largely bent toward the front side. Furthermore, it is disposed parallel to the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a and is disposed so as to project downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the abutted portion where the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a comes in surface contact is disposed largely in front of the notches 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a and also abuts, the gap Is not formed. Therefore, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa abuts It can not be dropped toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the 3010).

  As described above, the contact portion 640a formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. To the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the dropped game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) As well as functioning as a basket that can be prevented from falling toward the head, it also functions as a receptacle for metal powder of the gaming ball B. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a tank rail for guiding gaming balls from a ball tank to the downstream side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). The tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging the foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter dropped from a hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board disposed below the tank rail, an electrical trouble occurs to cause a problem in the control board or cause a malfunction etc. It had become. In recent control boards, the increase in the number of control targets reduces the connector pin spacing, and the increase in the number of connectors reduces the connector spacing and further reduces the IC pin spacing. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical problems caused by foreign matter dropped from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The entire configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 115 is a front view showing the inside of the game area where game balls in the game board circulate. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. General winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B in the game area 5a, first start opening 2002, gate section 2003, a second start port 2004, a first winning hole 2005, and a second winning hole 2006 are provided (see FIG. 115). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning combination It is for playing a game in which the hitting operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed through the mouth 2006 and the like.

  The game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the back of the front component 1000 and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115) in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is to be in the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 99 and FIG. 137 etc.) for controlling the content.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in a visible manner The peripheral control unit (not shown) disposed behind 1100, the effect display device 1600 disposed in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the game panel 1100 It further comprises a front unit 2000 attached to the front, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The effect display device 1600 is configured of a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit and the like are accommodated in a frame-like metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-like metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is accommodated in a transparent synthetic resin box. The metal back cover is fixed by being fixed to the frame-like metal frame and electrically connected, and is also connected electrically to the ground (GND) line of the drive circuit housed in the frame-like metal frame. It is supposed to be.

  The effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of itself, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. It becomes the ground (GND) of the The effect display device 1600 is a display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the area of the liquid crystal panel surrounded by the frame-shaped metal frame is visible by surrounding the periphery of the liquid crystal panel with the frame-shaped metal frame. A double-sided adhesive tape is attached to the front of the frame-shaped metal frame, and a single transparent plate (in this embodiment, a plate thickness of 1 mm so as to cover the front of the frame-shaped metal frame and its inner region) ) Is attached (bonded).

  In addition, an attachment portion for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 is formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and one of the metal shield plates of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. A through hole is formed to expose the portion. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, the detailed description thereof will be described later. The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is in contact with the metal back cover via the conductive elastic member through the formed through hole. As a result, the metal shield plate of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball B inserted into the gaming area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B; The second start port 2004, which can receive the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery that the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 draws the lottery based on the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, The first special lottery result or the second special lottery that is drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the reception of the game ball B to the one starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 A first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B at either depending on results, and a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and one general winning hole 2001. A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the starting opening unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001, and vertically middle at the right end in the front view of the gaming area 5a And a gate unit 2300 having a gate portion 2003 attached to the lower side, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 attached at the center of the game area 5a in a front view. A frame-shaped center character 2500 having a first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is a box shape attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and open at the front, and a square opening closed by the effect display device 1600 being removably attached from the back side to the back wall. And a lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted in the back box 3010, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300. ing.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 114 and 115. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and abuts against the game ball B rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction in the frame. The gaming ball B induced to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (the game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and an inner portion of the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. At each portion, a security concave portion 1009 recessed rearward from the front end is provided. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear projection 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. This notch 1010 matches the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch and the lower full tank path The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 are adapted to face forward.

5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 and 100. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) to be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is assumed. In the present embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  Although not shown, the panel board 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and has an out recess 1111 recessed downward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. In addition, a plurality of opening portions for attaching the front unit 2000 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back.

  The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder has a through hole which holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and which penetrates in the front and back direction with an inner size substantially the same as the game area 5a ing.

  Moreover, the panel holder is provided with the notch part notched upward from the lower end in a front view lower left corner. This notch is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are penetrated and the lower portion is full The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the tongue passage unit 610 are adapted to face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 which is notched rearward from the front end at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state to the game board 5 and A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  With the substrate holder 1200 assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface It can be made to discharge from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 137) for controlling the game contents and payout of the game ball B, and the main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the substrate holder 1200. And have.

  The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. By forming the cover body and the beta body transparently by using polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not the illegal modification is performed, or the illegal IC is mounted Can be checked from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, the main control board box 1320 In order to open the control substrate box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second start opening sensor 2511, a first large winning opening sensor 2512, a second large winning opening sensor 2513, a starting opening solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid 2515. , A second attachment solenoid 2516, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 114 and FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  In the function display unit 1400, the detailed illustration omits the shin, and displays a state display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming state, and two normal lottery results for drawing by passing the game ball B against the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display made of LEDs, and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are provided.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball B, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special hold number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 ing.

  Furthermore, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the number of times of opening and closing patterns of at least one of the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 Equipped with a round indicator, which consists of five LEDs to display the number of rounds.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 or the like that controls the progress of effects provided to the player based on a command from the main control board 1310.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decoration boards on the door frame 3 side, other boards (peripheral data ROM board described later, liquid crystal output board), etc. There is. The configuration of peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can visually recognize from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and a part of the rear end is the opening of the panel plate 1110 It penetrates and projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B The second start-up port 2004 where the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, and the first start-up port 2002 or the second start-up port 2004 The first special winning opening 2005 and the second big winning allowing the reception of the game ball B in at least one according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B It is provided with a 2006, a.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the lateral center of the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed near the lower end in the vertical direction near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. Directly below the gate unit 2003, the right general winning opening 2001 is arranged. The second start port 2004 is disposed at a height slightly below the left of the gate portion 2003 and slightly below the right general winning port 2001. The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed at a height slightly below the second starting opening 2004 and slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002. The second large winning opening 2006 is disposed slightly lower on the left side of the first large winning opening 2005.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1008 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has one start winning port 2001 and one first start port 2002, and a start port A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the unit 2100 and having two general winning openings 2001, and with respect to the center in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a A gate unit 2300 attached to the lower side and having a gate part 2003, and attached to the center of the game area 5a slightly above the center in a front view, and one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, Closed the frame of the center character 2500 and the center character 2500 having the first big prize port 2005 and the second big prize port 2006 Includes a transparent front direction unit 2600 is attached to so that the.

  The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate unit 2003 formed such that one game ball B can always pass in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003.

  In front unit 2000, gaming ball B accepted in general winning opening 2001 is sent to back unit 3000 on the rear side of gaming panel 1100 and detected by general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to lower substrate holder 1200. Exhausted. In addition, the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start opening sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Be done.

  In addition, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2511 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. After the gaming ball B received by the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2512 or the second large winning opening sensor 2513, the game ball B is moved to the back of the gaming panel 1100. It is sent and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

5-8. Center feature]
The center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. 116 is a front view of the center role and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. The center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 5 a in a front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. 3300 can be viewed from the front. In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B inserted into the game area 5a is within the frame. It can not intrude into

  The center character 2500 has one general winning opening 2001 disposed at the lower right corner in a front view on the outer periphery of the frame, a second starting opening 2004 slightly below the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening 2004 The first large winning opening 2005 is disposed below the second starting opening 2004, and the second large winning opening 2006 is disposed slightly below the first large winning opening 2005. In addition, the center character 2500 is capable of releasing the game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2501 and the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open for entry on the outer peripheral surface on the left in front view. And a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the gaming ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center character 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center character 2500 is In the state of being attached to 1110), the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed to be lowest. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowermost portion in the center in the left-right direction becomes lower toward the front, and the gaming ball B can be released into the gaming area 5a from this portion. In the center product 2500, the height of the lowest part of the stage 2503 is substantially the same height as the second starting opening 2004.

  The center portion 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, and the high portion (top) of the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the gaming ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  In addition, the center role 2500 has a second start opening sensor 2511 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004 and a first large for detecting the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. A winning opening sensor 2512 and a second large winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B received by the second large winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 137). In addition, the center role 2500 has a starting opening solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the normal drawing drawn by passing the gaming ball B of the gate unit 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting First Attacker Solenoid 2515 which opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the mouth 2004, and the first starting opening 2002 or A second attack solenoid 2516 is provided to open and close the second large winning opening 2006 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

  The center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, and the right side from the center in the left and right direction of the upper surface in the front view and the upper portion of the right side are the outer periphery of the game area 5a Between the two, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed. In addition, when the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the front lower right corner has the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 arranged. The portion at the lower right corner in the front view extends to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and forms a space between the portion at the lower right corner and the upper portion at the right side. The gate unit 2300 is disposed in the space.

  Therefore, the game ball B can pass through the gate portion 2003 with high probability when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate the right side of the center character 2500. While being able to do, it is possible to make the game ball B receive to the 1st large winning a prize mouth 2005 which is opened with high probability (is open) and the 2nd large winning a prize mouth 2006.

[5-8-2. Table production unit]
The table rendering unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120 and the like. FIG. 117 is a side cross-sectional view as seen from the right by cutting the table effect unit along with the center character at the center in the left-right direction. FIG. 118 is an explanatory view schematically showing a relation between the LED in the front effect unit and the reflection concave portion of the front light guide plate. FIG. 119 is a front view showing a light emission mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 120 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is made to emit light.

  The table rendering unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the frame-shaped center character 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center character 2500. The table rendering unit 2600 is mounted on the upper surface of the reflector 2620 and the transparent flat surface light guide plate 2610 which closes the inside of the frame of the center character 2500, the reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the surface light guide plate 2610 A front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 for emitting light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, a front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and a reflector 2620 are covered with a center feature And a front cover 2650 attached to the 2500.

  The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed on the transparent flat light guide plate main body 2611 and the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 from any of the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide main body 2611 And a plurality of fine reflecting recesses 2613 for reflecting incident light forward. The plurality of specific light entrance sections 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 includes four of the first specific light entrance section 2612a, the second specific light entrance section 2612b, the third specific light entrance section 2612c, and the fourth specific light entrance section 2612d. It is configured. The first specified light receiving portion 2612 a, the second specified light receiving portion 2612 b, the third specified light receiving portion 2612 c, and the fourth specified light receiving portion 2612 d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) Then, from left to right in order, it is arranged in two rounds (the fourth specified light receiving portion 2612 d is returned to the beginning first to become the first specified light receiving portion 2612 a).

  The reflective recess 2613 has a flat surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612 and inclined 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 . The reflective recess 2613 is recessed in a pentroof triangle. The reflective recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. In addition, the reflective recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the specific light receiving portion 2612 not corresponding thereto in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611.

  Thereby, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 118, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612, it is reflected to the front of the light guide plate main body 2611 (vertical direction with respect to the paper surface) From the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflective recess 2613 appears to emit light. On the other hand, as shown by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 118, when light is incident from the specific incident light portion 2612 which does not correspond, it is reflected by the reflective recess 2613 in a direction other than the front of the light guide plate The player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 looks as if the reflective recess 2613 does not emit light.

  In the present embodiment, as the reflection recess 2613, the reflection recess 2613 has a form in which it is extended in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light entrance 2612 in a state of being recessed in a triangle. It does not need to be limited to, and may be extended in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612.

  The plurality of reflective recesses 2613 correspond to any one of the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflective recesses 2613a corresponding to the first specific light entrance portion 2612a, the second specific light entrance portion 2612b. Of the second reflecting recesses 2613b corresponding to the third specific light receiving portion 2612c and the fourth reflecting portions 2613c corresponding to the fourth specific light receiving portion 2612d And a recess 2613d.

  In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 capable of light emission display in different modes by reflecting light in a specific group of the plurality of reflection recesses 2613 in the forward direction. There is. The plurality of patterns 2614 includes a first pattern 2614a consisting only of a plurality of first reflecting recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b consisting only of a plurality of second reflecting recesses 2613b, and a third consisting only of a plurality of third reflecting recesses 2613c It is comprised from pattern 2614c and 4th pattern 2614d which consists only of several 4th reflective recessed part 2613d.

  The first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentrically arranged in order from the outside to the center as shown in FIGS. 116 and 119, etc. (following the fourth pattern 2614d) Are arranged so as to return first to become the first pattern 2614a).

  The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. The reflector 2620 can hold the front and back sides of the front light guide plate 2610 by inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recess 2621, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. it can. In the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixing recess 2621, through holes 2622 vertically penetrating are formed in the portions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640.

  The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 has a strip-like shape extending in the left and right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on the lower surface directly above the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (mounted) on portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is formed on the top surface of the reflector 2620 so that the plurality of LEDs 2630 can face downward through the through holes 2622.

  The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached to correspond to the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 includes a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light receiving portion 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light receiving portion 2612b, and a third specific light receiving portion 2612c. And a fourth LED group 2630 d corresponding to the fourth specific light receiving portion 2612 d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide the plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction In order, the circuit is arranged in two rounds (the order next to the fourth LED group 2630d returns to the first LED group 2630a). In the present embodiment, six LEDs 2630 are provided in each of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d.

  Next, the light emission effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light, the light is made incident from the first specific light entrance portion 2612a into the light guide plate main body 2611 and is reflected to the front at the first reflection recess 2613a. Since the two reflection recesses 2613b, the third reflection recesses 2613c, and the fourth reflection recesses 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the first reflection recesses 2613a can be seen as shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The first pattern 2614a configured of the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 119 (a)).

  When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light, the light is made incident from the second specified light entrance portion 2612b into the light guide plate main body 2611, and is reflected to the front by the second reflection recess 2613b. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflecting recess 2613b can be seen as shining from the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The second pattern 2614b composed of the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 119 (b)).

  When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light, the light is incident from the third specific light entrance portion 2612c into the light guide plate main body 2611, and is reflected to the front at the third reflection recess 2613c Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the second reflection recess 2613b, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflection recess 2613c can be seen as shining from the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The third pattern 2614c configured of the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 119 (c)).

  When the fourth LED group 2630 d of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is made to emit light, the light is made incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2612 d into the light guide plate main body 2611 and is reflected to the front by the fourth reflection recess 2613 d. Since the first reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the third reflecting recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting recess 2613d will be seen as shining from the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1, The fourth pattern 2614d configured of the plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d can emit light (see FIG. 119 (d)).

  As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be respectively emitted, the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be divided into a first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group 2630c, a fourth When light is emitted in the order of the LED group 2630d, light can be emitted in the order of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center It is possible to perform light emission effects such as animation.

  On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are caused to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630 d, the third LED group 2630 c, the second LED group 2630 b, and the first LED group 2630 a, a fourth pattern 2614 d, a third pattern 2614 c, a second pattern Light can be emitted in the order of the pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a, and light-emitting effects such as animation with a motion that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

  As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be made to emit light by the front light guide plate 2610 of one sheet. There is no need to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center character 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a large space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. It can be made easy to secure. Therefore, since a large space can be secured behind the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged to improve the appearance of the game area 5a to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and in addition to the effect by the light emission display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect By performing movable effects by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., various effects can be provided to the player, and the player is entertained to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 due to point-like light emission of the plurality of reflection concave portions 2613 are floated up by the front light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600. Since a moving light emitting decoration can be shown like animation, a strong impact can be given to a player who is familiar with light emitting effects using a conventional light guide plate, and the player can be surprised and entertained. The player can be made to think that something is good, and the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since only the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 can favorably view the light emission display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, the other players away from the front view the pattern 2614. It can be difficult to notice that the light emitting display is hard to be seen, and that the effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is performed to the other player, and the other player is prevented from paying attention As a result, the player can play the game without hesitation to other players, and can enjoy the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached by being sandwiched by the fixing concave portions 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate can do. Thus, the LEDs 2630 (the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d) are disposed at positions corresponding to the specific light entering portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each of the LEDs 2630 can be reflected forward to the front by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably emitted.

  Furthermore, since the front light guide plate 2610 is mounted within the frame of the center character 2500 to which the center character 2500 is attached at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, light is emitted even if the pattern 2614 is caused to emit light by the LED 2630 The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, making it difficult to see the game. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted and to enjoy the game in a good state.

  In addition, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the conventional case where the light guide plate 2610 is attached The backlash between them can be eliminated, and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at the desired position with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned relative to the specific light entrance portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 Luminescent display can be reliably performed.

  Furthermore, since the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is disposed only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611 by arranging the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, The rear of the light guide plate main body 2611 is not surrounded by the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630), and the rear cover (frame) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate main body 2611. Since it is possible to avoid dividing the effect image or decoration of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the present invention, the effect image etc. can be easily viewed from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. While being able to entertain in a good state and suppress the decline in interest, there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in front view. In a feeling of opening may be a pachinko machine 1, can be assumed to be appealing is strongly attracted the attention of a player to improve the appearance of the game area 5a.

  In addition, since the front surface light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center character 2500, the peripheral edge of the front surface light guide plate 2610 and the frame of the center character 2500 are aligned with each other. And the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be made difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to surprise the player who thought that 2610 does not exist by giving a strong impact to the player and enjoying the light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 to suppress the decrease in interest it can.

  Furthermore, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflectors 2620 from the player side, the appearance of the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated by the reflectors 2620 etc. being seen. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By making the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display not predicted by the player, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed and the player is entertained. It can be made to think that there is something good for it, and it is possible to make the expectation for the game higher and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image behind the front light guide plate 2610 is provided, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 Therefore, it is possible to show various effects to the player by combining them appropriately, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 are displayed. Thus, the player can be entertained by the effect produced by the player, and the decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 Is different, and by displaying effect images associated with the plurality of patterns 2614 light-emitting and displayed by the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the pattern 2614 being light-emitting and displayed. The effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In the embodiment described above, the reflection concave portion 2613 has a triangular cross section and extends constantly, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a cross section having a semi-circular arc shape and extend constantly, a cross section There may be a polygon having a constant length, a cross section having a curved shape and a constant length, or the like.

  In addition, the LED 2630 may be a single color or a full color. In addition, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light entrance portion, the reflective recess, and the LED group can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 121 to FIG. FIG. 121 is a front view of the game board showing the lower front central decoration in the lower movable presentation unit with light emitted, and FIG. 122 is the lower front central decoration with the lower central elevator base lifted in the lower movable presentation unit and FIG. 123 is a front view of the game board showing the lower rear central decoration lighted, and FIG. 123 is a lower movable presentation unit with the lower central elevator base, lower left side elevator base and lower right side elevator base raised to lower front It is a front view of the game board which shows the central decorative body, the lower back central decorative body, the lower left side decorative body, and the lower right side decoration in a light emitting state. FIG. 124 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation section of the effect operation unit is at the raised position with the gaming board in the state of FIG. 123. Further, FIG. 125 shows the four rotating decorative bodies in the lower movable effect unit, the left side rotating decorative body, the left sub-side rotating decorative body, the right side rotating decorative body, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body, respectively, It is an explanatory view showing an outline of a. FIG. 126 is an explanatory view schematically showing types (sizes) of arrows displayed by light emission in the lower movable effect unit.

  FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board showing the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 128 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 130 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 131 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable presentation unit.

  In the back unit 3000, the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the back surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects gaming balls B received in the general winning openings 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor that detects gaming balls B received in the first starting opening 2002. And a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 137).

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder and open at the front, and has a back box 3010 having a square opening on the back wall where the effect display device 1600 faces forward, and the inside of the back box 3010 The lower movable effect unit 3100 attached to the lower portion, the upper back movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper portion in the back box 3010, and the upper portion in the back box 3010 attached to the front of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 And an upper front movable effect unit 3300.

[5-9-1. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 126 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower portion in the back box 3010, and a part thereof is located in front of the lower portion of the effect display device 1600. The lower movable presentation unit 3100 is disposed below the presentation display device 1600 and near the front end of the back box 3010, and the lower central presentation arranged behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110. A unit 3120 and a lower left side rendering unit 3150 and a lower right side rendering unit 3170 disposed respectively on the left and right sides of the lower center rendering unit 3120 are provided.

  The lower front central decoration unit 3110 is provided with a lower front central decoration 3111 having a light transmitting property in a trapezoidal shape (inverted isosceles triangle with its apex flat) which is narrowed downward. The lower front central decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center character 2500 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 in the assembled state on the game board 5. The lower front central decorative body 3111 is capable of emitting light by the lower central decorative substrate of the lower central rendering unit 3120.

  The lower central rendering unit 3120 is mounted on the front of the lower central elevator base 3121 and the lower central elevator base 3121 which is movably mounted in the back box 3010 behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and is translucent. And a lower central decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs disposed on the rear side of the lower rear central decorative member 3122 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. And a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper portion of the lower central lift base 3121.

  Also, although the lower central rendering unit 3120 is not shown, a unit base attached to the back box 3010 and a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower central elevating base in the vertical direction, A rod-like arm member whose base end is rotatably attached to a unit base around an axis extending back and forth, a slide pin attached to a tip of the arm member and inserted into a slit of the lower central lift base 3121; And a lower central lifting drive motor for rotating the motor.

  The lower central lift base 3121 has a slit (not shown) extending in the left and right directions, and a slide pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted in the slit. The lower central elevating base 3121 is between the lowered position where the whole is behind the lower front central ornament 3111 and the raised position where the whole is above the lower front central ornament 3111 by the lower central elevating drive motor. It is mounted to be able to move up and down.

  The lower rear central decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape and has a plurality of light emitting areas 3122 a arranged in the vertical direction. The lower back central decoration 3122 can be lighted and decorated by the emission of the LED of the lower central decoration substrate. The lower central decorative substrate is mounted such that a plurality of LEDs can individually embellish each light emitting area 3122a of the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower central elevating base 3121 is raised. At times, light is mounted to be able to emit light toward the lower front center decoration 3111 that is downward and forward.

  Although the central movable unit 3125 is not shown in detail, it is attached to the upper end of the lower central lift base 3121 with a gap in the left-right direction, and a plurality of mounting bases each extending in a flat plate shape; A plurality of central rotary drive motors mounted on a plurality of mounting bases with the rotary shaft directed in the left and right direction, and mounted on the rotary shafts of each central rotary drive motor, the outer periphery of each central rotary drive motor And a plurality of cube-shaped rotating ornaments 3126 covering them. The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 are rotatable about an axis extending leftward and rightward by a central rotary drive motor, and are arranged coaxially in the left-right direction. In addition, in each of the rotary ornaments 3126, different decorative portions 3127 are formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 125). The plurality of rotating ornaments 3126 can be independently rotated by the respective central rotation drive motors.

  The central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121 below each of the rotary ornaments 3126, although not shown, and can emit light toward the respective rotary ornaments 3126. It has a lower center top decoration board on which the LED is mounted. By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the lower central upper surface decoration substrate, it is possible to cause each of the rotating ornaments 3126 to emit light and decorate.

  Although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 of the lower movable rendering unit 3100 is not shown in detail, it has a flat lower portion extending horizontally and a flat side extending upward from the left end of the lower portion. It has a flat upper side extending to the upper side of the lower piece from the upper end of the side and upper side of the side and shorter to the right than the lower piece, and the front face of the unit base of the lower central rendering unit 3120 A left unit base mounted in the back box 3010 on the left side of the view, and a cylindrical guide whose lower end and upper end are respectively attached to the lower piece and the upper piece near the right side of the side of the left unit base A rod-shaped male screw rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down by the lower unit and the upper unit of the left unit base so as to extend in parallel with the shaft and the guide shaft, and an external thread is formed on the outer periphery Members, Lower left side lifting base 3151 having a nut screwed to a screw member and slidably mounted on a guide shaft, and lower left side lifting drive mounted on a left unit base and rotating a male screw member The motor is attached to the front of the lower left side lifting base 3151 and has a light transmitting lower left side decoration 3152 and the right side of the lower left side decoration 3152 and is lighted toward the left And a lower left side decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3152a arranged in a line in the vertical direction, and by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate, each light emitting area Each 3152a can be lighted and decorated independently.

  Also, although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 is not shown in detail, it is slidably mounted on the upper portion of the lower left side lifting base 3151 in the left-right direction and has a slider extending in the front and rear direction; The lower left slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower left side lift base 3151 so that the rotation axis extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotation axis of the lower left slide drive motor And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the base end side.

  Furthermore, although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 is not shown in detail, with the mounting base attached to the slider and extending in the form of a flat plate upward, with the rotation axis directed to the mounting base in the left-right direction The left side rotary drive motor is attached, and the cube-shaped left side rotary ornament 3153 is attached to the rotary shaft of the left side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left side rotary drive motor. In the left side rotary ornament 3153, different decorative portions 3154 are formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 125). The left side rotary ornament 3153 is rotatable about an axis extending leftward and rightward by a left side rotary drive motor.

  The lower left-side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the slider below the left-side rotating ornament 3153 and can emit light toward the left-side rotating ornament 3153 although not shown in detail. It has a lower left side upper surface decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left side upper face decoration substrate, the left side rotary decoration 3153 can be made to emit light and decorate.

  Furthermore, although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 is not shown in detail, it is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the left unit base and to the sub mounting base which extends flatly upward and the sub mounting base. A cube-shaped left sub-side rotation motor attached to the left sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis facing in the left-right direction and the rotation shaft of the left sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the left sub-side rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3155. In the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, different decorative portions 3156 are formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 125). The left sub-side rotary ornament 3155 is rotatable about an axis extending in the left and right direction by the left sub-side rotary drive motor.

  Further, although the lower left side rendering unit 3150 is not shown in detail, it is attached to the upper surface of the upper part of the left unit base below the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155 and headed toward the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155 The lower left sub-side upper surface decoration substrate is provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light. The light emission decoration of the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155 can be performed by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left sub-side upper surface decoration substrate.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 is a lower part of the left sub side rotating decoration 3155 attached to the left unit base at a height to which the left side rotating decoration 3153 can enter downward when assembled on the game board 5. The lower central lifting base 3121 of the central rendering unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 when the lower central lifting base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the rising end. In addition, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is a left side effect element 3153 between the left side effect element 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 and the left element 3126 when the left sub side effect element 3155 is assembled on the game board 5. There is an open space where

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevation drive motor, whereby the left side rotary ornament 3153 together with the slider via the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower center effect unit 3120 The lower central lifting base 3121 can be raised and lowered between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decoration 3126 in the lowered position and a raised position at the same height as the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155. Also, the lower left side rendering unit 3150 rotates the cam member with the lower left slide drive motor to move the left side rotary decoration 3153 through the slider closer to the lower central rendering unit 3120 and an adjacent position. The left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 may be slid away from the lower central rendering unit 3120 in the left-right direction.

  Although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 of the lower movable rendering unit 3100 is not shown in detail, it has a flat lower portion extending horizontally and a flat side extending upward from the right end of the lower portion. It has a flat upper side extending to the upper side of the lower piece from the upper end of the side and upper side of the side and is shorter than the lower piece to the left, and the front face of the unit base of the lower central rendering unit 3120 A right unit base mounted in the back box 3010 on the right side and a cylindrical guide whose lower end and upper end are respectively attached to the lower and upper pieces near the left side of the side of the right unit base A rod-shaped male screw rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down by a shaft and a lower piece and an upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend in parallel with the guide shaft, and an external thread is formed on the outer periphery Members, A lower right side lifting base 3171 having a nut screwed to a screw member and slidably mounted on a guide shaft, and a lower right side lifting drive mounted on a right unit base and rotating a male screw member The motor is attached to the front of the lower right side lifting base 3171 and has a translucent lower right side decoration 3172 and the right side of the lower right side decoration 3172, and light is emitted toward the right And a lower right side decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3172a arranged in a line in the vertical direction, and by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate, each light emitting area Each 3172a can be lighted and decorated independently.

  Also, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is slidably mounted on the upper portion of the lower right side lifting base 3171 in the lateral direction and has a slider extending in the front and rear direction; The lower right slide drive motor mounted on the rear side of the lower right side lift base 3171 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side mounted on the rotary shaft of the lower right slide drive motor And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending horizontally from the base end side.

  Furthermore, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, with the mounting base attached to the slider and extending in the form of a flat plate upward, with the rotation axis directed to the mounting base in the left-right direction The right side rotary drive motor is attached, and the cube-shaped right side rotary ornament 3173 is attached to the rotary shaft of the right side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right side rotary drive motor. In the right-side rotary ornament 3173, different decorative portions 3174 are formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 125). Further, the right side rotary ornament 3173 is rotatable about an axis extending in the left and right direction by the right side rotary drive motor.

  Further, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached below the right side rotary ornament 3173 on the upper surface of the slider and can emit light toward the right side rotary ornament 3173 It has a lower right side upper surface decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right side upper surface decoration substrate, the right side rotating decoration 3173 can be made to emit light.

  Furthermore, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece portion of the right unit base and extends in a flat plate shape upward to the sub mounting base and the sub mounting base. A cube-shaped right sub-side rotation motor attached to the right sub-side rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis directed in the left-right direction and the rotation shaft of the right sub-side rotation drive motor and covering the outer periphery of the right sub-side rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3175. In the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175, different decorative portions 3176 are formed on four circumferential surfaces (see FIG. 125). The right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 is rotatable about an axis extending in the left and right directions by the right sub-side rotary drive motor.

  Also, although the lower right side rendering unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached to the upper surface of the upper part of the right unit base below the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 and headed toward the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 The lower right sub-side upper surface decoration substrate is provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light. The light emission decoration of the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175 can be performed by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decoration substrate.

  The lower right side effect unit 3170 is a lower part of the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 attached to the right unit base at a height to which the right side rotating decoration 3173 can enter downward when assembled on the game board 5. The lower central lifting base 3121 of the central rendering unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 when the lower central lifting base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the rising end. In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is a right side effect 3173 between the right sub turning effect 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 when the right sub side effect 3175 is assembled on the game board 5. There is an open space where

  The lower right side rendering unit 3170 rotates the male screw member by the lower right side lifting drive motor, thereby combining the slider with the slider via the lower right side lifting base 3171 and the lower center rendering unit 3120. The lower central lifting base 3121 can be raised and lowered between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decoration 3126 in the lowered position and a raised position at the same height as the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175. Also, the lower right side rendering unit 3170 rotates the cam member with the lower right slide drive motor to move the right side rotary decoration 3173 through the slider closer to the lower center rendering unit 3120 and to an adjacent position. The slide can be made to slide in the left-right direction between a lower central rendering unit 3120 and a retracted position located about a half of the lower right side rotating decoration 3175 away from the lower central rendering unit 3120.

  The lower movable effect unit 3100 is, as shown in FIG. 125, the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotary decorative bodies 3126, the decorative portions 3154 of the left side rotary decorative body 3153, the decorative portions 3156 of the left sub-side rotary decorative body 3155, and the right Different decorations are respectively formed on the decoration portion 3174 of the side rotation decoration 3173 and the decoration portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175. The four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173 and the right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 are each formed in a cube of a dice shape and extend left and right Different decorations are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the rotation axis.

  With the first faces of the four rotating decorations 3126, left side rotating decoration 3153, left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, right side rotating decoration 3173, and right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 facing the front, from the left "One eye" "one eye" "one eye" "two eye" "third eye" "four eye" "one eye" "one eye" has become. In addition, when the second surface of each is directed to the front, it is "star" "super" "chi" "ch" "n" "su" "!" "Star" from the left. In addition, when the third side is directed to the front, "!" "凰" "ゲ" "キ" "ア" "ツ" "凰" "!" From the left. Furthermore, when the fourth side is directed to the front, "Congratulation", "!", "O", "Me", "De", "To", "U" and "!!" are from the left.

  In this manner, the faces of the same number are respectively directed to the front with the four rotary decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotary decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotary decorative body 3155, the right side rotary decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotary decorative body 3175. Thus, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expectation value to be a "big hit" can be displayed according to the content of the message.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 126, the lower movable effect unit 3100 causes the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower back center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 to emit light as appropriate. The "arrows" of different sizes can be displayed in a luminous manner. Specifically, when only the lower front central decorative body 3111 is made to emit light, a triangular "small arrow" whose apex of the isosceles triangle is directed downward can be emitted and displayed (Fig. 121 and Fig. 126 (a) reference). In addition, when the lower front central ornament 3111 and the lower rear central ornament 3122 are caused to emit light, the downward middle "middle arrow" having a rod extending upward more than the "small arrow" is caused to emit light. (See FIG. 122 and FIG. 126 (b)). Furthermore, in the state of "middle arrow", lower left side decoration 3152 and lower right side decoration 3172 are raised, lower front center decoration 3111, lower back center decoration 3122, lower left side decoration 3152, lower right When all the side decorations 3172 are made to emit light, it is possible to emit and display a “large arrow” in which the upper end of the arrow pointing downward more than the “middle arrow” spreads to the left and right (FIG. 123 and FIG. 126 (c) See).

  As described above, since three arrows of different sizes of "small arrow", "middle arrow" and "large arrow" can be displayed by light emission, "big hit" in the order of "small arrow", "middle arrow" and "big arrow" It can be made to emit light and display that the expectation value which becomes "" is high.

  Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In the lower movable effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like in a normal state, in the lower central effect unit 3120, the lower central elevating base 3121 is a back position of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and a lowered position not visible The four rotating decorative bodies 3126, which are located at the upper end of the lower central lifting base 3121, are positioned in contact with the upper end of the lower front central decorative body 3111 in a front view.

  Further, in the normal state, in the lower left side rendering unit 3150, the lower left side lifting base 3151 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 and at a lowered position hardly visible from the front, The left side rotary ornament 3153 is separated from the lower central rendering unit 3120 to the left through the slider, and a half of the left side rotary ornament 3153 is located below the left sub side rotary ornament 3155, and the left sub side rotary ornament 3155 It is located in the vicinity of the lower end in the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  Furthermore, in the normal state, in the lower right side rendering unit 3170, the lower right side lifting base 3171 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 at a lowered position hardly visible from the front, The right side rotation decoration 3173 is separated from the lower center rendering unit 3120 to the right through the slider, and a half is located at the retreat position where the lower half of the right sub side rotation decoration 3175 is located. It is located in the vicinity of the lower end in the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  In this normal state, as one of the effects to be provided to the player, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 According to the lottery result, after rotating the four rotary ornaments 3126, the rotation of the respective rotary ornaments 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each of the rotary ornaments 3126 which has stopped rotating. Make the player visually recognize As a result, the player can be sloppy and pounding on the basis of whether or not the rotation of the four rotating ornaments 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and the moving effects by the four rotating ornaments 3126 can be enjoyed.

  When the combination of the decorative parts 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfy the predetermined condition, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 is attached to the lower central lifting base 3121 by the lower central decorative board. The light emitting decoration is performed on the lower front central decoration 3111 of the lower front central decoration unit 3110 located on the front side.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 121, since the lower front central decoration body 3111 causes the downward arrow to be displayed by light emission, the line of sight of the player can be displayed below the game area 5a by the light emission display of the downward arrow. The player can be guided to the effect operating unit 301 disposed in the main body, and can urge the player to operate the effect operating unit 301 and easily participate in the player participation type effect operating the effect operating unit 301 It is possible to make the player enjoy the player participation type effect and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Or, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 from the normal state, the lower central lifting base 3121 Raise from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view gaming area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to surprise the player and make the player think that there is something good to be done, which can increase the sense of expectation for the game. After that, the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 are rotated, and the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 stopped rotating is given to the player Make it visible. As a result, when the four rotating ornaments 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination with respect to the player, "big hit" (an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (sometimes described as "big hit gaming state")). Can make the player think that it should be a lottery result), and make the player feel swayed by whether or not the rotation of the four rotating ornaments 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and a sense of expectation for the lottery result It can be enhanced. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 whose rotation is stopped satisfy a predetermined condition, a plurality of lower central decorative substrates attached to the lower central elevating base 3121 which is rising The LED is made to emit light, and the lower rear central decoration 3122 disposed in the front and the lower front central decoration 3111 disposed in the lower front are emitted and decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 122, a large downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111. The line of sight of the elderly person can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged below the game area 5a to urge the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be It can be thought that it becomes a "big hit" by operating, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 to enjoy the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by reception of game ball B to first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004 from the normal state, lower central lifting base 3121 Is raised from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the four rotary decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view gaming area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to surprise the player and make the player think that there is something good to be done, which can increase the sense of expectation for the game. Subsequently, the left and right left side rotary ornaments 3153 and the right side rotary ornaments 3173 are slid to the center side appearance position, and then the lower left side elevator base 3151 and the lower right side elevator base 3171 are respectively Raise to the raised position (see FIG. 123). As a result, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to make an expectation of the game to be heightened by making it think that the lottery result is not a "big hit". After that, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 are rotated and then stopped rotating. The decoration 3156 of the sub-side rotation decoration 3155, the decoration 3154 of the left side rotation decoration 3153, the decoration 3127 of each of the four rotation decorations 3126, the decoration 3174 of the right side rotation decoration 3173, and the right subside rotation decoration The player is allowed to visually recognize the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decorative portions 3127 includes the decorative portion 3127 on which the decoration of the number is applied, the countdown is performed by stopping the rotation so that the decorative portion 3127 of the number faces forward. It is possible to perform such an effect, and to make the player have an interest in the game by making the player think that the lottery result must be a "big hit" by the effect of the countdown. Then, when the rotation of the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155, the left side rotary ornament 3153, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the right side rotary ornament 3173, and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 is stopped and the countdown is completed, The lower front central decoration 3111, the lower back central decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 are lighted and decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123, since a further downward arrow (giant arrow) is emitted and displayed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301 arranged at the tip of the giant arrow. The player can be convinced that the lottery result is a "big hit", and the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 with certainty. When the huge arrow is light-displayed, a message explaining the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised, and the rotation of the effect operation unit 301 is performed. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 124). As a result, the player's interest can be enhanced by rotating the rotation operation part 302 at a high speed, so that the pressing operation part 303 can be surely pressed and the player's enjoyment is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  As the effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 124, the characters “The rotation of the lower button is hot!” Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the player is made to pay attention to the player The faster the rotational speed of the unit 302 is, the higher the expected value for the "big hit" is notified to the player. That is, the expectation value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and the effect display device 1600 displays the effect image for notifying the player of the expectation value.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 124, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 is, as shown in FIG. 126, lower front center decoration 3111, lower back center decoration 3122, lower left side decoration An effect image may be displayed that suggests an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 in which the player's operation is prompted by the “arrow” light-emittingly displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decoration 3172 or the like. Specifically, effect images such as “press a button!”, “Turn the dial!”, “Turn the dial to the left!”, “Turn the dial to the right!”, And the like are displayed. As a result, the operation in the effect operation unit 301 can be accurately performed, and the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit 301 can be surely enjoyed.

  Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an expected value to be a "big hit" may be displayed by the effect image. Expected values are calculated using the four rotary decorations 3126, the left side rotary decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotary decoration 3155, the right side rotary decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotary decoration 3175, each of which is formed in a dice shape. It may be displayed.

  As display of expected value using four rotating ornaments 3126, left side rotating ornament 3153, left sub-side rotating ornament 3155, right side rotating ornament 3173, and right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 which are respectively formed in a dice shape The effect of displaying a "big hit" expected value is performed by a combination of the decorative portions 3127, 3154, 3156, 3174, and 3176 facing the front by rotation and stopping. . Specifically, in the case where only the four rotating ornaments 3126 of the lower central rendering unit 3120 at the center are used, there are, for example, the following three patterns. In the pattern a1, the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing each front when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating is displaying the expected value in the state of the combination of pieces that the player can not read the meaning. No pattern. The pattern a2 is such that each of the rotary ornaments 3126 is rotationally stopped with the second surface facing forward, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is in the state of “ch” “ch” “ch” “s”, and the expected value is somewhat high The pattern showing that. The pattern a3 is such that each of the rotary ornaments 3126 is rotationally stopped with the third surface facing forward, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is in the state of "g" "ki" "a" "tsu", the expectation value is extremely high The pattern showing that. As described above, the expected value can be displayed by the patterns displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotary ornaments 3126, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of the pattern a1, the pattern a2, and the pattern a3.

  Furthermore, as effects using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotary ornaments 3126, left side rotary ornaments 3153, left sub-side rotary ornaments 3155, right side rotary ornaments 3173, right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 ( An effect of displaying an expected value that would be a "big hit" by combining the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 using dice-shaped rotating bodies of eight) You may do so. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. The pattern b1 is a combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 whose rotation is stopped (the expectation value is not displayed). In the pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "が" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "チ" "ャ" The combination of the right side rotation decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is “凰” or “star” (chance display). In the pattern b3, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "g" "「 " A combination of “ツ”, “T”, the right-side rotating decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is “凰” or “star” (represented by “Gekitsu”). In the pattern b4, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating ornament 3153 is "super", and the four central rotating ornaments 3126 are "チ" "ャ" "ス" "A combination of the right side rotation decoration 3173 is"! "And the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is" 凰 "or" star "(super chance display). In the pattern b5, the left sub-side rotary ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left side rotary ornament 3153 is “super”, and the four central rotary ornaments 3126 are “ge” “ki” “a” “ "A combination of the right side rotation decoration 3173 is"! ", And the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is" 凰 "or" star "(super Geography display). In pattern b6, left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is "holiday", left side rotating ornament 3153 is "!", And four central rotating ornaments 3126 are "o" "me" "de" "to" right side The combination of the rotary ornament 3173 is “U” and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 is “!!” (“big hit” confirmed). Thus, the rotation is stopped by the eight rotating bodies of four rotating decorative bodies 3126, left side rotating decorative body 3153, left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, right side rotating decorative body 3173, right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of the pattern b1, the pattern b2, the pattern b3, the pattern b4, the pattern b5, and the pattern b6.

  In the above-described effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a predetermined time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect of displaying the above-described expected value is not performed, The light emission display of the arrow also goes out. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a predetermined time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect such as displaying the above-described expected value is continuously performed using the remaining effect time. When the effect time ends, the effect described above ends and the light emission display of the “arrow” is also turned off, and the effect ends.

  As described above, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the gaming state is changed due to the game being performed in the gaming area 5a in the normal state (the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) Depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of B), the four rotating ornaments 3126 aligned on the upper side of the lower front center ornament 3111 are rotated or the lower center The four rotary ornaments 3126 aligned side by side with the lift base 3121 ascend with the lower rear central ornament 3122 or the four rotary ornaments 3126 raised by the lower central elevator base 3121 rotate or lower left Lower left slide drive motor of side effect unit 3150, lower right slide drive motor of lower right side effect unit 3170, etc. Structure), the left side rotation decoration 3153 and the right side rotation decoration 3173 slide in the left and right direction, the left side rotation decoration 3153 and the right side rotation decoration 3173 rotate, the slide mechanism and the lower left side Four rotating decorative bodies 3126 and left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 in which the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 are elevated by the lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 It is possible to show the player a moving effect such that the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged side by side, or the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 or the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175. Rotating decoration 3126), left side rotating decoration 3153 and right side turn Decorative body 3173, and it is possible to focus on the left Sabusaido rotary decoration member 3155 and the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  In addition, when the lower central lift base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower back central decoration 3122 is made to emit light to cause the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light, thereby displaying a downward arrow light emission, or the lower central lift The base 3121 is raised, and a plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration substrate cause the lower back central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light, thereby causing a large downward arrow to be emitted, or a pair of lower left side elevators Since the larger downward arrow can be displayed by emitting light by raising the base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, the light emission can be displayed. The player can be entertained even by the effect, and the downward displayed light is displayed. Arrow makes it possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301, it is possible to prompt the operation of the staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the player participates in the effect by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302, rotating the rotation operation unit 302, pressing the pressing operation unit 303, or the like. Can be entertained.

  Therefore, since various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation effects can be performed as described above, various patterns of effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to predict the effect pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by the unexpected effect being performed, and the player Can be controlled to suppress the decline in interest for the game.

  In addition, as described above, the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower back center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, the lower right side decoration 3172, and the like cause a downward arrow to be emitted and displayed to the player. An effect image for prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an effect image for explaining the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an advantage game state in which the player is advantageous when the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted. By displaying an effect image or the like indicating the relationship between the occurrence of the effect and the effect operation unit 301, etc., it is possible to strongly urge the player to participate in the player participation type effect which operates the effect operation unit 301, The effect operation unit 301 can be easily operated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9-2. Upper rear movable effect unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper portion in the back box 3010 above the effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable rendering unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the rear box 3010 and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the rear box 3010.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is slidable in an oblique direction from the upper left to the lower right on the left base 3211 and the left base 3211 mounted in the back box 3010 although detailed illustration is omitted. The left slider 3212 attached, the linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and the upper rear A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the left drive motor 3214 and having the rotary shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 connected to the input side, and a spur gear drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 , A spur gear engaged with the drive gear 3215 and rotatably mounted on the left base 3211 The second transmission gear 3217 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the first transmission gear 3216 and the first transmission gear 3216 and rotatably mounted on the left base 3211, and the second transmission gear 3217 A third transmission gear 3218 rotatably attached to the left base 3211 and a spur gear pinion gear 3219 meshing with the third transmission gear 3218 and the rack gear 3213 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211 And have.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and extends to the left and right in the form of a flat upper rear left decorative body 3220 and an upper rear left decorative body 3220. And an upper rear left decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 can emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear left decorative substrate.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 can raise and lower the upper rear left decorative body 3220 via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left drive motor 3214.

  The upper rear rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable rendering unit 3200 is not shown in detail but is mounted on the right base 3231 mounted in the back box 3010 and slidable in the diagonal direction from the upper right to the lower left Right slider 3232, a straight rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, an upper rear right drive motor 3234 mounted on the right base 3231 with its rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and an upper rear right A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3234 and having the rotary shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234 connected to the input side, and a spur gear drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250; A spur gear engaged with the drive gear 3235 and rotatably mounted on the right base 3231 The second transmission gear 3237 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the first transmission gear 3236 and the first transmission gear 3236 and rotatably mounted on the right base 3231 and the second transmission gear 3237 A third transmission gear 3238 rotatably attached to the right base 3231 and a spur gear pinion gear 3239 meshing with the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231 And have.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and extends to the left and right in the form of a flat upper rear right decoration 3240 and the rear of the upper rear right decoration 3240. In the upper rear right decoration substrate, which has a plurality of LEDs mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs of the upper rear right decorative substrate.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 can raise and lower the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234.

  The clutch mechanism 3250 includes a cylindrical storage case 3251, and a plurality of projections 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the storage case 3251 in the storage case 3251, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper The input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and the plurality of transmission grooves 3253a in which the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252 is inserted with a clearance in the circumferential direction in the housing case 3251 The drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 protrudes from the plurality of cam surfaces 3253 b which are formed so that the distance between the input member 3252 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrower as they approach the protrusion 3252 a of the input member 3252. An output member 325 having an output shaft 3253c to which the A plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, a tightening spring 3255 for tightening the storage case 3251 from the outside, a storage case 3251 and It has an accommodation recess 3256a for accommodating the clamp spring 3255, and closes the accommodation housing 3256 attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231 and the accommodation recess 3256a of the body housing 3256 and outputs the output member 3253 A shaft 3253c is provided with a cover 3257c, and a bearing 3258 attached to the cover 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted (see FIGS. 129 (a) to (c)).

  In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the plurality of projecting portions 3252 a of the input member 3252 is at the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253. When it abuts, the output member 3253 is rotated, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253 c of the output member 3253 is rotated. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can directly transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or drive gear 3235 side.

  In addition, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 through the output shaft 3253 c, the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 moves in the direction of the projecting portion 3252 a of the input member 3252 As a result, the gap between the cam surface 3253 b and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 is narrowed, and the roller 3254 is engaged therebetween. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, and the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is the upper rear via the input member 3252 It is not transmitted to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward acts by gravity, the clutch mechanism 3250 can drive the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 through the output member 3253. Since rotation is locked, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 do not move downward without permission, and load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. Instead, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary position.

  In the clutch mechanism 3250 of this embodiment, the storage case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 consisting of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the storage case 3251 are stored in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 through the output shaft 3253 c increases by a predetermined amount or more, the clamping force (biasing force) of the clamping spring 3255 The housing case 3251 is rotated against the above, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts on the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated by a strong force from the output side, a slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is reduced to the upper rear left Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper back right drive motor 3234 side and released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and the lock can not be released, or the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 are damaged. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the projecting portions 3252 a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b, and two rollers 3254. Alternatively, the lock spring 3260 may be configured to urge each of the lock springs 3260 toward the projecting portion 3252 a closer to the lock spring 3260. As a result, when force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251. The rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from when the rotation from the upper back left decoration body 3220 side and the upper back right decoration body 3240 acts can be caught between the inner surface and the upper back left decoration body 3220 It can be reduced as much as possible.

  Next, the effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is positioned above the effect display device 1600 and rearward of the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is not visible from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are not driven, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 do not move downward freely.

  Thus, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward to prevent downward movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is not necessary to provide an electrical lock mechanism for preventing the movement of the pachinko machine 1 and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. In addition, since the upper back rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 can be prevented from moving by the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250, the game board 5 is being transported, or the game hall is attached to the island facility The upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 remain at the state of the origin as shipped, even if vibration or acceleration at the time of etc. acts, and there is no need to perform unnecessary home adjustment. It is possible to reduce the time and effort for installing the game board 5, and to suppress the increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In this normal state, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of gaming balls B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the upper rear left driving motor 3214 and When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 move obliquely downward toward the center through the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220. And the left end of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 abut to form one large decorative body (see FIG. 127). As a result, a large decorative body extending to the left and right appears on the front upper portion of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  As described above, according to the upper rear movable presentation unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between each of the decorative body 3240 and the decorative body 3240), vibration from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies etc. which can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and the upper portion Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate as the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 try to move downward due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 The roller 3254 is moved to the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253 b of the member 3253. The roller 3254 is pressed between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the upper portion from the output member 3253 side (upper back left decoration 3220 side and upper back right decoration 3240 side) Since the transmission of the rotation to the rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is cut off and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 descend by themselves Of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can be prevented from moving unexpectedly (falling) and If the rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 move unintended, the player is distrusted The can be avoided, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to delight movement of the upper left rear decorative body 3220 and the upper right rear decorative body 3240 to the player.

  Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are going to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be stopped at any height position via the right slider 3232, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 are various. It is possible to show the player a variety of effect patterns that are stopped moving up and down at the position, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with the movable effects of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. It can be done.

  In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the upper rear left The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and the early breakage of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload can be prevented and the upper portion It is possible to prevent interruption of the game due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 129 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the projecting portion 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively locked by the lock spring 3260. The roller 3254 is immediately urged to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side in a case where it is urged toward the protruding portion 3252a close to each of them. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and after the rotation from the upper rear left decoration 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration 3240 side acts, the lock The rotation of the output member 3253 can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel discomfort in the movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240, and enjoys the movable effect by the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 are moved downward to bring the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 into contact with each other, whereby the upper back left decoration 3220 and Since the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be united to form a large decorative body, the appearance of the large decorative body can give a strong impact to the player by causing the large decorative body to appear, and the player can be enjoyed It is possible to make it appear that an advantageous gaming state (eg, "big hit game") will be generated for the player by the appearance of a large decorative body, as well as the appearance of a large decorative body. The feeling can be enhanced to suppress the decline in interest. When the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 abut each other and unite, it is attempted to move the upper back right decoration 3240 or the upper back left decoration 3220 on the opposite side by bringing the other into contact with each other. Because each of the clutch mechanisms 3250 is provided, the upper back left decorative body 3220 and the upper back right decorative body 3240 are moved to move from the output side. Even if force is applied, the roller 3254 is engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 While being able to prevent movement by contact between the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240, it is possible to prevent the movement of the upper back by the reaction of the contact. The decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can also be prevented from returning, and the player can surely enjoy the movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 abut and unite It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the accommodation case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodation case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodation recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. The roller 3254 is pressed by the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 to the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by rotating the 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force for rotating the storage case 3251 is applied through the plurality of rollers 3254, a force (torque) for rotating the storage case 3251 is a frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Between the containing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, when the housing case 3251 is rotated, the output member 3253 is rotated through the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts on the projecting portion 3252 a of the input member 3252. The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated by a strong force from the output side, a slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is reduced to the upper rear left Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper back right drive motor 3234 side and released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and the lock can not be released, or the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 are damaged. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be embodied as a pachinko machine that can reliably prevent the operation and effects described above.

[5-9-3. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is mounted on the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 at the upper portion in the back box 3010 above the effect display device 1600 in the front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is vertically vertically mountable to the unit base 3301 and the upper front drive motor 3302 mounted to the unit base 3301 and the horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper part in the back box 3010 And an upper front movable decorative body 3350 which is raised and lowered by driving of an upper front drive motor 3302.

  The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is disposed on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 and the circular central decorative body 3351 mounted so as to be vertically movable (downward) at the center in the horizontal direction of the unit base 3301. A pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a connected to each other and rotatably mounted on a rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction A first projecting decorative body 3352 having a connecting rod 3352 b, a pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353 a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, and a pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353 a A second projection rotatably mounted on a rear side of the central decoration 3351 coaxially with the first connecting rod 3352b of the first protruding decoration 3352 and extending in the front-rear direction A second projecting decorative body 3353 having a Yuibo 3353B, and a.

  In the first protruding decorative body 3352, a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a is formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape whose bottom side is the central decorative body 3351 side. The pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a is such that the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed rearward of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the left side. The first projecting decorative body 3352 has a link attaching portion 3352c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the right side described later is rotatably attached at the tip of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side.

  In the second protruding decorative body 3353, a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353 a is formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape whose bottom side is the central decorative body 3351 side. In the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed in the front-rear direction behind the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. The second projecting decorative body 3353 has a link attaching portion 3353c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the left side described later is rotatably attached at the tip of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side.

  In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a of the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a of the second projecting decorative body 3353 have the same shape and the same size, respectively. There is. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side behind the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the left side and a first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side behind the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. The first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are arranged to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  Although the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is not shown, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the front of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a. And a second projecting decorative portion decorative substrate, and a central decorative body 3351, a pair of first projecting decorative portions 3352a, and a pair of upper front central decorative substrate, a first projecting decorative portion decorative substrate, and a second projecting decorative portion decorative substrate. The second projecting decorative portions 3353a can be independently light emitting and decorating.

  The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is mounted on the unit base 3301 so as to be symmetrical about the axis extending forward and backward at a symmetrical position across the center of the front surface in the left and right direction. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod-like shape and a pair of first link rods 3303 are rotatably mounted around their axes whose proximal ends extend back and forth, and their distal ends are the first protrusion A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably mounted around axes respectively extending back and forth in the link mounting portion 3352 c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353 c of the second projecting decorative body 3353, and the front surface of the unit base 3301 Stopper 3305 protruding forward from the top to restrict the upward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303, and the tip of the first link rod 3303 It includes a lower stopper 3306, a for regulating the rotational downward.

  Next, effects using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 114 etc., the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is elevated, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. The first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 131 (a)). In this normal state, since the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap in the front-rear direction, the player can be recognized as one decorative body. Further, in the normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stoppers 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip end side moves upward is blocked.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Then, the central decorative body 3351, together with the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, moves the entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward. At this time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward while extending horizontally. When the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward, the right second link rod 3304 attached to the link attaching portion 3352 c of the first protruding decorative portion 3352 a on the right side, and the left side The left second link rod 3304 attached to the link attachment portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a moves downward respectively, and the pair of second link rods 3304 are attached to the tip, respectively. The first link rods 3303 rotate so that their tip ends move downward.

  Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 that rotate with the downward movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (central decorative body 3351) abut on the lower stoppers 3306, respectively, further rotation is blocked It will be in a state (refer FIG. 131 (b)). When the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward after the pair of first link rods 3303 abut on the lower stoppers 3306, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a on the right side and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side are Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are the centers of the first connecting rod 3352 b and the second connecting rod 3353 b ( The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the side opposite to the side on which the second link rod 3304 is attached are rotated about the center of the central decorative body 3351 in the downward movement direction. (See FIG. 131 (c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so that the scissors open. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged, and the player can be surprised to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 overlap in the front-rear direction to form one decorative body. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are opened so that their tips move away from each other. It is possible to surprise the player who has been recognized as one decoration, and to entertain the movement of the upper front movable decoration 3350.

  In addition, only by moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward by the action of the first link rod 3303 and the second link rod 3304, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be It is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 because they can be opened by rotating in opposite directions with each other.

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side (rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000) provided on game board 5 shown in FIG. The entire configuration of the lens will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 132 to FIG. 132 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 133 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 134 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 135 is a line X-X in FIG. 136 is a sectional view taken along arrow A of FIG. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a transparent cover 1501 which is open at the rear and has a box shape longer in the left-right direction compared to the vertical direction, and main control for controlling the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progression of effects based on a command from main control board 1310 of unit 1300, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control board 1510 And a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise entering the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530. , Conductive (attached) to a predetermined place on a metal shield plate 1540 A sexual member 1545 includes a transparent base member 1502 for closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. By mounting various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with metallic shield plate 1540 in the inner space of cover body 1501, shield plate 1540 is mounted. The peripheral control substrate box 1505 (sealing substrate box) is constituted by the cover 1501 and the base 1502 by being sandwiched by the cover 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover 1501 by the base 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by peripheral control board 1510 in addition to peripheral control board 1510 on various boards mounted in the internal space of cover body 1501 There are a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. When the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, the peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two thirds, and is disposed on the left side of the cover 1501. In the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a square shape in the remaining about one third of the remaining area when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right of the cover 1501 is While being disposed on the side, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501 having a square shape that is two turns larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  The substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are electrically connected by an inter-substrate connector described later, and the inter-substrate connectors described later between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of peripheral control substrate 1510, the ground (GND) line of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the ground (GND) line of liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 and the electrical of the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, is molded transparent, and viewed from the front, covers the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular cover plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) The side walls 1501 b to 1501 e are formed in the shape of a box having an opening by protruding toward the rear (the front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 which is on the center slightly upper right side of the cover flat plate 1501a and which is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The fan mounting recess 1501 aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa are formed on the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa along a plurality of concentric circles whose centers are in the top, bottom, left, and right directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa, a cylindrical predetermined shape is inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape. Guide projections 1501 aab 1 to 150 1 aab 4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the opposite side to the opening side of the cover 1501. By forming the slit holes 1501 aaa in the shape of a circular arc, it is possible to prevent an unfair act of illegally taking out various electronic components and the like included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, in the cover flat plate 1501a, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into and attached to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa, the front-side surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front-side surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal seat-backed nabe screw (a screw having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated) not shown is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the air-cooling fan FAN pops out of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa by the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seat-in-place nabe screw, coming into contact with the front of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover flat plate 1501 a Can be prevented.

  When peripheral control board 1510 is fixed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of FAN attachment recess 1501aa In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the fan attachment recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501aa (the distance from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom dimension of the fan attachment recess 1501aa is shorter In the position where the wiring extraction recess 1501 ab is formed to project toward the opening of the cover 1501. When the air cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa, a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wire drawing recess 1501 ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side as viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501 ac is a fan attachment recess 1501 aa as two closed, substantially horizontally elongated rectangular regions (more precisely, convex regions with the volume adjustment switch 1510 d and the connector CN 1 at the top and the connectors CN 2 to CN 7 at the bottom) The cover body 1501 is formed to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a lower position (a position having a long distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501aa) compared to the bottom surface There is. Connector holes 1501 ac1 to 1501 ac7 and volume control holes 1501 ac8 are formed on the bottom of the connector recess 1501 ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510 d. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501 ac generally occupies the lower right area when the cover plate 1501 a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a measure for insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. Two reinforcing ribs 1510 aci 1 and 1510 aci 2 which are long in the vertical direction and which do not interfere with the holes 1501 ac 8 are formed to project forward at predetermined intervals.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, And the volume adjustment holes 1501 ac 8 are exposed. At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plug corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted, the plug is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover flat 1501a above the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac. It can not project from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and can not protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thereby, dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallicity or the like adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d even if they fall from the cover side wall 1501b. Can be prevented.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has one closed rectangular area whose position corresponds to that of the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side as viewed from the front. The opening of the cover body 1501 at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a long distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) The bottom of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac are disposed on the same plane. Connector holes 1501 ac 9 and 150 1 ac 10 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN 8 and CN 9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 on the bottom surface of the connector recess 150 1 ad.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom of the connector recess 1501ad. . At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501 ac, even if the plug corresponding to the connectors CN 8 and CN 9 is inserted, the plug is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover plate 1501 a on the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 150 1 ac. It can not project from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thereby, even if dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallicity, etc. falls from the cover side wall 1501b, adhesion to the connectors CN8 and CN9 can be prevented. It is supposed to be.

  Further, as seen from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a, a wire lead-out opening 1501ae is formed along the left side of the cover flat plate 1501a at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A mounting recess 1501 af for communicating with the wiring lead-out opening 1501 ae and for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape capable of closing the wiring lead-out opening 1501 ae compared to the bottom surface of the above-mentioned FAN mounting concave 1501 aa It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover 1501 at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN attachment recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501 af has a cylindrical shape which is inserted into the through hole 1503 a at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503 a formed in the wiring cover 1503 (a distance shorter than the distance in the depth direction of the wiring cover 1503) And a protrusion 1501 afa having a dimension) is formed to protrude toward the opposite side to the opening side of the cover 1501, and at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503 b 1, 1503 b 2 formed in the wiring cover 150 3, mounting holes 1501 afb 1 , 1501 afb 2 are respectively formed.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fitted in the mounting recess 1501 af, the front surface of the wiring cover 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat 1501 a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal nabe screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in wiring cover 1503, and screwed from the front to the rear of wiring cover 1503 into mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively. The wiring cover 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501 af.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501 af, the wiring lead-out opening 1501 ae is closed and a plurality of wirings connected to the connector CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the plurality of wiring lines of (1) from being touched. The wiring cover 1503 is made of non-conductive resin and is molded to be transparent.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501 ca and 1501 cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501 c on the left side and having a predetermined distance between the centers. In addition, a hinge hook 1501 cc disposed above the guide 1501 ca and projecting outward, and a hinge hook 1501 cd disposed below the guide 1501 cb and projecting outward are respectively formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501 ca and 1501 cb. On the other hand, L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd. In addition, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral control substrate 1510 is disposed on the left side of the rear surface of the cover 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and peripheral control A copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1510, and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are peripheral control boards, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed on an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat 1501a. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540, which will be described later, are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed into the L-shaped through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged to match the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510. The mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged to match. A peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal nabe screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal respectively correspond to each other. The lands 1510 rf 2, 1510 rf 3 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 150 1 ag 2, 150 1 a 3 3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 150 1 a are in contact with each other. Further, the lands 1510 rb 1 to 1510 rb 4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control substrate 15 10 and the seat surface of the metal flat screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal nabe screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively, whereby the metal shield plate is formed. The circuit 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit ground to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to provide the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Because the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. .

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal nabe screw inserted and screwed into the through hole 1510r1 to 1510r4 is an opening of the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover 1501. It is arranged inside the end face of the side (that is, it does not protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  Cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as viewed from the rear surface so that peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the back surface of cover body 1501. At a position where the pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are formed in a diagonal shape, they are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover 1501 It is done. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, A copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively formed A wiring pattern is formed on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may correspond to mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal nabe screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward attachment boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540 b 1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, among the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 contact each other. It will be in the state of contact. In addition, lands 1520 rb 1 to 1520 rb 4 formed on the back surface side of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a seat surface of a metal nabe screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal nabe screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so that the shield plate 1540 made of metal becomes peripheral data. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit ground to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. And the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Become.

  When peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal nabe screw inserted and screwed into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 is the one of cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501. It is disposed on the inner side of the end face on the opening side (that is, not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back side of cover flat 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501 a corresponds to four through holes 1530 r 1 to 1530 r 4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as viewed from the rear surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover 1501. At the positions, the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed in a diagonal shape by being projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover 1501 ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a liquid crystal output A copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1530, and the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 15530rb4 are respectively liquid crystal output substrates A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1530.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed on an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat 1501a It arrange | positions so that it may correspond to boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal nabe screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, among the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1530 rf 2 to 15 30 rf 4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501 n 1 and 150 1 n 2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat 1501 a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501 am 2 respectively abut In this state, the lands 1530 rb 1 to 1530 r b formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 abut on the seat surface of the metal nabe screw, respectively. Furthermore, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal nabe screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that the metal shield plate 1540 is a liquid crystal output substrate. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Therefore, the shield plate 1540 made of metal is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, whereby the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM are obtained. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Because the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. .

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal nabe screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 is the opening of the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover 1501. It is disposed inside the end face of the side (that is, not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the rear surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501 And the various substrates in the state of being held and fixed, a gap having the above-described predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the fan attachment recess 1501aa (In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are respectively formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan attachment recess 1501aa. When the wing portion of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa rotates, peripheral control is performed by causing air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wing by this rotation. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through the vent holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover 1501 (especially, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of cover flat plate 1501 a, seven connectors CN 1 to CN 7 provided on peripheral control substrate 15 10 and seven connector holes 150 1 ac 1 to 150 1 ac 7 formed on cover body 150 1. A space is formed, and a space is formed between the volume control switch 1510 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the volume control hole 1501 ac8 formed on the cover 1501. In addition, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501 a, the two connectors CN 8 and CN 9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 15 30 and the two connector holes 150 1 ac 9 and 150 1 ac 10 formed in the cover 1501. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wing portion of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501aa rotates, air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. The air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the vent holes 1501az described above, and the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and seven formed on the cover body 1501 The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the gaps formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the volume control holes 1501ac8 formed on the cover 1501, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Two connectors CN8 equipped And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa formed on the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa is the area of the ventilation holes 1501 az formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 The above-described gap (the volume formed by the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the cover 1501 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 And a gap formed in the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, and two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. Therefore, when the wing portion of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501aa rotates, air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. A plurality of air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, a plurality of vent holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of shield plates 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in through the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in a plurality of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed small.

6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin and is molded transparent, and viewed from the front, on the upper side, the left side, the lower side and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular base plate 1502a The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the front (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502 b to 1502 e of the base body 1502 is formed to be somewhat larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501 b to 1501 e of the cover body 1501. Thus, in a state in which the opening of the cover 1501 is closed by the base 1502 by covering the cover 1501 with the base 1502, the cover side 1501 b1 501 e of the cover 1501 is provided on the inside of the base side 1502 b-1502 e of the base 1502. And fit in (surface contact).

  The base flat plate 1502a has predetermined intervals along the lower side as viewed from the front, and wires for these connectors CN2 to CN7 are located at positions not interfering with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. Elongated in the vertical direction long and thin break prevention rib parts 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 being broken by the force when inserting the connector for connection And a force for inserting a connector for connecting a wire to the connector CN1 at a position not interfering with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 or a force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d Causes the peripheral control board 1510 to warp and the peripheral control board 15 Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  In addition, the base flat plate 1502a is an L-shaped circuit at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d which is formed on a right side and is bent on a metal shield plate 1540 described later, as viewed from the front. A rectangular through hole 1502ab long in the vertical direction is formed, which is a shape that is slightly larger than the back surface shape of the ground piece 1540d.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side, an engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed. In the engaging portion 1502ca, guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab are provided at positions corresponding to the plate-like guiding portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. The hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad are respectively formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped sack portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf.

  While inserting the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, the U-shaped groove shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. The L-shaped hooks 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, in a state in which the L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove shaped bags 1502 cae and 1502 caf of the hinge receiving parts 1502 cac and 1502 cad. By turning the hook receiving portion 1502cac, 1502cad of the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portion 1502cae, 1502caf, the hook portion 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover 1501 is hooked with the L-shaped collar portion 1501cca, 1501cda. It can be engaged.

  Further, at the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are respectively formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side.

6-3. Shield plate]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise entering the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield as viewed from the front. L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the present embodiment) on the upper left side center and lower left side center of the flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) Are formed respectively.

  Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment) on the upper side and lower side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) as viewed from the front. L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward only 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are respectively formed, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) An L-shaped circuit earth piece 1540d is formed between the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 and bent backward by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, 25 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a). A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

  The shield plate 1540a is formed with a notch around the periphery thereof so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and substantially at a position corresponding to the fan attachment recess 1501aa of the cover plate 1501a and the wiring extraction recess 1501ab. A square opening 1540 aa is formed. Thereby, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state in which the cover 1501 and various substrates hold and fix, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover 1501 do not respectively interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat 1540a, and the fan attachment concave 1501aa of the cover flat 1501a and The wiring lead-out concave portion 1501ab is inserted without being in contact with the opening 1540aa of the shield plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are disposed in the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540 b 1, 1540 b 2, 1540 c 1, and 1540 c 2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540 a are formed to be parallel to each other. In the present embodiment, the distance from the surface of the shield plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are respectively formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is projected from the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is a mounting boss hole of one of the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501 ai 1, 1501 ai 2 formed. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is a mounting boss hole of one of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are respectively formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are directed from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the opening side of the cover 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510. It is two mounting boss holes among four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to be protruded.

  Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, the distance dimension (the actual implementation) of a predetermined height between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a In the embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form two spaces.

  These two spaces are a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface (surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) of various substrates and the back surface of the shield flat surface 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A second space 1505a (see FIG. 135) (in the present embodiment, 12 mm) and a second space between the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a, which will be described later. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 135) having a distance dimension of the predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like included in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e described later, power generation circuit not shown, Resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), LEDs ML1 to ML4 to be described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 to be described later, various electronic components etc. provided on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a to be described later, resistor not shown, capacitor not shown, While a special connector SCN3 or the like to be described later and various electronic components etc. (not shown, a capacitor not shown, a special connector SCN4 to be described later, etc.) provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by housing various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. The reason is that heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not housing the first space 1505a. That is, in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise, the metal shield plate 1540 also has a function as a heat sink.

  In the shield flat plate 1540 a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540 az of the same shape are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501 az formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501. That is, similar to the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. There is. When the wing of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa of the cover 1501 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. Thus, the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air cooled.

6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and a conductive covering portion 1545a, It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 1545c stuck to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester woven fabric in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, a polyimide film in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed, and the like. As a foam 1545b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be mentioned. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape in which an acrylic adhesive is used can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and peels off the peel paper when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (bonded) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width with a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

6-5. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / O interfaces. , Etc., and various programs capable of controlling the progress of the game effects and demonstrations (demonstrations to be performed in the player waiting state) and the progress of the effects and peripheral control IC 1510 a accumulated on one semiconductor chip, etc. Various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510 b for storing various schedule data in advance and the peripheral data ROM 1520 a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be transferred and stored. It is possible to supply power even when the power is shut off to the SDRAM 1510c composed of Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2, the slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real time clock IC (not shown). A backup power supply 1510 e, a power supply generation circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7 are provided. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, which are provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, have various IC connectors and the various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. The pin spacing between ~ CN7 and special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on peripheral control board 1510 is increased, so the spacing between connectors CN1 to CN7 is narrowed, and the spacing between connector CN7 and special connector SCN2 is also narrowed. ing.

  The control ROM 1510 b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

  As various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510, there are various serial I / O, various parallel I / O, and the like. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication, and the like.

  In this embodiment, UART communication is used as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communicate via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, various boards provided on the door frame side There is also a communication method in which SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the above (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

  In this embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 (for example, various motors provided in the lower movable effect unit 3100, communication via the connector CN6 or connector CN7 Or an electric drive source (for example, the operation ring drive motor 342 or the operation button elevation drive motor 367 provided in the effect operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3 side, and communicate via the connector CN3. The drive data is transmitted to the drive control IC for driving the various types of sensors (for example, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 provided on the game board 5 side). Various detection sensors, which communicate with each other via the connector CN6) as detection data. Received or various sensors provided to the door frame 3 side (e.g., a variety of sensor provided in the staging operation unit 300, communicating via a connector CN3.) And receives a signal from the detection data. In the present embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, General Purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to GPIO (via the connector CN1) or The signals from various sensors that check the operation of the control target and the origin position are not input to GPIO (via connector CN6) or the control signal for the control target (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side from GPIO (connector CN6 And outputs a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Moreover, in the present embodiment, GPIO is used to function as serial communication. For example, in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), while generating a clock signal from GPIO, based on this clock signal, output data one bit at a time from GPIO It can produce serial data. By using such GPIOs to function as serial communication, for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)) Light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board side serial systems to (communicated via connector CN1), and communicated via a plurality of LEDs (connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side. Light emission data can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1 and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist) The connector CN5 is assigned to UART communication, the connector CN6 is assigned to SPI communication and GPIO (that is, the connector CN6 is assigned as a SPI communication and GPIO co-resident connector), and the connector CN7 is assigned to SPI communication Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and realizes a high transfer speed of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 at high speed to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a according to an instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , And can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520 a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510 a.

  Peripheral control substrate 1510 further includes special connector SCN1 for connecting peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 with the substrate, and special connector SCN2 for connecting liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with the substrate. Peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is equipped with special connector SCN 3 for connecting peripheral control substrate 1510 to the substrate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 includes a peripheral control substrate 1510 and a special connector SCN 4 for connecting the substrates.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a system of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal types include RGB type, LVDS type, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) type, eDP (Embedded Display Port) type, clockless type, and the like. In the system, four systems (four systems in total) of one system of RGB system, two systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system are adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as a system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, an eDP method is adopted, and a peripheral control board is one system of RGB method, two systems of LVDS method (first LVDS method, second LVDS method) and one system of eDP method 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LED ML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LED ML2 near the SDRAM 1510 c, an LED ML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LED ML4 near the special connector SCN2. As described later, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 35 V, DC + 12 V, and DC + 5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current +5 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current +5 V is supplied. The LED ML2 confirms (monitors) a state in which +12 V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state in which +12 V DC is supplied. The LED ML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current +35 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current +35 V is supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is in operation.

  Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of cover flat 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form a two space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of the cover flat 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 135) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back of the cover flat And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 135) having a distance dimension of two predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, as described above, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and various electronic components and the like provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. ing. The inside of the first space 1505 a formed in this manner can be brightly illuminated by lighting up the LEDs ML 1 to LED ML 4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 15 10.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the socket and the plug are fitted. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which there is no amount of movement of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front when fitting.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are plugs, and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are sockets.

  By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral control substrate 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-rear direction (back and front of the pachinko machine 1) The floating mechanism is provided to be able to absorb an error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the direction. The socket of the special connector SCN 3 provided on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 in a state where peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of cover flat 1501 a of cover 1501. The front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN 3 is not in contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 even if the peripheral control substrate 1510 is moved forward as viewed from the front A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN 3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are fitted. When the special connector SCN 4 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (peripheral control substrate 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (directions between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1) A floating mechanism is provided to be able to absorb an error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (peripheral control in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. Even if the substrate 1510 is moved forward as viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN 4 does not contact the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 even if it moves the maximum A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN 4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is to be controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), background images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, character images, image data such as symbol images, various decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 To the light emission data (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the various LEDs mounted in plural, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 The drive data etc. can be mentioned for carrying out drive control of the various movable performance bodies provided.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, is cheaper than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can reduce power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, adopting a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a realizes cost reduction and contributes to suppression of power consumption, and reading of various data stored at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in peripheral data ROM 1520 a from peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to peripheral control substrate 1510 accurately and surely. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are electrically connected to each other through the wiring (harness) is not employed, and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the control substrate 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-substrate connector, the influence of noise intruding into the inter-substrate transmission path is reduced.

  The mounting procedure of various substrates in the internal space of cover 1501 will be described later, but peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 inserts the socket of special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of special connector SCN1 provided in peripheral control substrate 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after being pressed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Thus, a plurality of connection terminals are formed in the plug and the socket by absorbing an error in the front-rear direction which occurs when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. To prevent damage to the surroundings The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat 1501 a of the cover 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back surface side of the curved cover plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above. By absorbing the errors in the front and back direction that occur during operation, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is obtained. It can be formed reliably.

  The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 outputs the rendering data of the image to be rendered on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby advancing the effect on the effect display device 1600 (for example, for the player An image telling that a big hit gaming state occurs that is advantageous compared to the normal state, an image telling that a big hit gaming state does not occur, a big hit gaming state occurs compared to the normal state although a big hit gaming state does not occur It is an important substrate which draws an image etc. which conveys that it is approaching as an image. Therefore, drawing data of an image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control substrate 1510 needs to be transmitted to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 accurately and surely. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate are not electrically connected via the wiring (harness) between the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510. By adopting a configuration in which the connector 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-substrate connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-substrate transmission path is reduced.

  The mounting procedure of various substrates in the inner space of the cover 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 Since it is necessary to fix peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a after pressing, the socket of special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Accordingly, by absorbing an error in the front-rear direction which occurs when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510, a plurality of connection terminals are formed in the plug and the socket. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat 1501 a of the cover 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. By absorbing the errors in the front and back direction that occur in the process, damage to the multiple connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket can be prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be assured. It can be formed.

  When peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed on the back side of cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back of peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed. Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. As compared to the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced, so, for example, a large movable effect unit (operating a movable effect body on the game board 5) Drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the home position and working position) It can contribute to ensuring the order in the depth direction of the distance dimension.

6-6. Method of assembling peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. And the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. The mounting bosses are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a so that the through holes 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the side. Arranged to match the hole 1501ah2 and made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a, and through holes formed in liquid crystal output substrate 1530 The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control substrate 1510 are arranged corresponding to mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back side of the cover flat 1501a. The mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in the above are arranged corresponding to each other.

  Subsequently, a metal nabe screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward attachment boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. Fix peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back side of cover plate 1501a, insert a metal nabe screw (not shown) into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form on the back side of cover plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is It will be in the state clamped by the cover body 1501 and the liquid-crystal output board | substrate 1530. FIG.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes are formed. The peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal nabe screw (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a. It will be in the state clamped by the body 1501 and various substrates, and being fixed.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501 ai 1 1501 a 2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 150 1 a to restrict movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output substrate 15 30 is of the cover flat plate 150 1 a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side, the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting the vertical and horizontal directions The protrusion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is achieved by fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a by restraining the upper, lower, left, and right directions, and measuring dimensional errors due to such restraints. When fixed to the back side of 1501a, it is absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. It can be done.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover 1501 are The L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502 caa and 1502 cab formed on the engaging portion 1502 ca of the base body 1502. The hinge receiving portions 1502 cac of the engaging portions 1502 ca 1502 and the U-shaped groove shaped bags 1502 cae of the 1502 cad are inserted into the bag portions 1502 cae 1502 caf.

  Subsequently, a state in which the L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 abut the U-shaped groove shaped bags 1502 cae and 1502 caf of the hinge receiving parts 1502 cac and 1502 cad The L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540 d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502 ab of the base body 1502 to cover the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Metal one way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 by entering. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the front end surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 The base-side sealing unit 1502ea is sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted into and inscribed in (surface contact with) the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Further, in the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540 d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540 d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface of the lens is 6.8 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterrent against the fraudulent act on the peripheral control board box 1505 Is elevated.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan attachment recess 1501 aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are formed from the wiring drawing out recess 1501 ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a From the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the rear, a metal seat-backed nabe screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) not shown is screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2, respectively.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN 10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 through the wire lead-out opening 1501 ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501. The connector of (1) is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted in the mounting recess 1501 af formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover body 1501. A metal cover screw (not shown) is inserted in the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503 in the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501 af. Thus, the plurality of wires can be covered by the wire cover 1503 and can not be touched.

  Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is formed on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the shield plate 1540 made of metal protruding from the back surface Attach (adhere) 1545 adhesive tape 1545c.

  In the case where the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that accommodates the effect display device 1600 and is behind the gaming panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 The peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the side of the engaging portion 1502ca formed on the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. And insert a metal nabe screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to insert it into the mounting groove forming the mounting portion formed in the transparent synthetic resin box It fixes by screwing toward the attachment hole which comprises the attachment part formed in the back surface side of.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-like metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit and the like are accommodated in a frame-like metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-like metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is accommodated in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 etc. accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Are connected to the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit ground piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502 The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is hit via the conductive elastic member 1545 through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box 1540d as shown in FIG. It will be in the state of contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and collapsed in the height direction (in the present embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing dimensional deviation due to dimensional tolerance or assembly error. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thereby, the peripheral control board housed in peripheral control unit 1500 is brought into a state where the metal shield plate 1540 of peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of effect display device 1600 are electrically connected securely. It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 and can be made the same ground (GND), so that a strong environment against electromagnetic wave noise is constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can.

  In the attachment procedure of various substrates in the inner space of the cover 1501 among the assembling methods described above, for example, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal is The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal is disposed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a is formed on the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 to be formed. Of the metal shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged at the above-described predetermined position on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501 a of peripheral control substrate 1510 (peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of cover 1501 when cover 1501 is viewed from the back The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the above-described predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a cover when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back And the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed in. The source of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is in the above-described predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 sees the cover 1501 from the back and It can also be fixed to the left side). Also in the attachment procedure of such various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN 3 and SCN 4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing an error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in, the plug and socket Thus, it is possible to reliably form the transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 by preventing damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plurality, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral A transmission path between the control substrate 1510 and the substrate can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of gaming boards mounted on pachinko machines having different gaming specifications. In this embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three and mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be commonly used independently of the gaming specifications of the gaming board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is used for each gaming specification of the gaming board in the peripheral data ROM 1520a. The peripheral data corresponding to is stored as a substrate depending on the gaming specification of the gaming board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board which is not dependent on the game specification of the game board and is not a board of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Can be reused (used over). In addition, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 having peripheral data ROM 1520a storing peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board and peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specification of the game board.

  For example, as described above, there are a plurality of types of methods such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method as the methods of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 corresponding to the plurality of types of systems are electrically connected by the inter-substrate connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily exchanged according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) of the two LVDS system systems is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 according to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 by the inter-substrate connector described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and are formed in the inner space of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is held and fixed by the cover 1501 and various substrates. Then, a metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is used as a circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540, and the ground (GND) of various substrates and the ground of the power supply substrate 630 (GND) and from the frame earth board 559 shown in FIG. 86 (b) can be led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to the cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can.

  Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. And the arrangement of As described above, the vent holes 1501az and 1540az having the plurality of circular shapes can also cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function capable of confirming the presence or absence of a fraud.

  Specifically, when peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 134, ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes disposed on the right side of FAN attachment recess 1501aa are peripheral control boards. The part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510 b provided in 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510 b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the IC direction, part number , Pin numbers etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510 b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are checked from multiple angles. Distributed in such a way that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510 b. It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510 b and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, modification of the control ROM 1510 b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501 az and 1540 az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, since the LED ML1 disposed in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +5 V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, the direct current +5 V is originally supplied Improves the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins by additionally having the function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b, although it has the function of confirming (monitoring) the current state. This can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the above and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can check the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A region larger than the shape of the inter-substrate connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520), and further provided on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 The part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (for example , Connector pin count, IC Orientation, part number, pin number etc.), that is, it is silk-printed on the surface of peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of IC pins, and peripheral control substrate 1510 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. The contents are distributed and arranged so as to be large areas where it is possible to confirm substantially from multiple angles. Thus, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence with the above, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are It can confirm via the ventilation hole 1501az which has several circular shape. Also, since the LED ML3 disposed in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +35 V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, the direct current +35 V is originally Although it has a function to confirm (monitor) the supplied state, as a spotlight that illuminates the inter-board connector brightly by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 By further having the following functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 silk-printed respectively Improved the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  In addition, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az disposed on the lower left side of the fan attachment recess 1501aa can check the connection state of the inter-substrate connector between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. And a region larger than the shape of the inter-substrate connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530), and further, the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate In order to be able to visually recognize the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on each of 1530 and 1530, respectively, they are distributed. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the content silk-printed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-substrate connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is confirmed through the vent holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Also, since the LED ML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is designed to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is in operation, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is basically checked (monitored) Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the inter-substrate connector with the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 as a bright light. The improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the improvement of the visibility of the inter-substrate connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the part numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1, In order to be able to visually recognize the state of the IC pins 1510c2 and the contents (for example, the orientation of the IC, part numbers, pin numbers, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 To be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. It is arranged. Thus, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the modifications of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can. Further, since the LEDML2 disposed in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c configured from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is configured to maintain the lighting state in a state where +12 V DC is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, Although it originally has a function to confirm (monitor) the state where DC +12 V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510 c brightly, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510 c (that is, SDRAM 1510 c1, 1510 c2) This can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the above, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, among a plurality of blades constituting the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blade and the blade (specifically, a gap between the blade and the blade by rotating the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN by an examiner) The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from the above. Thereby, it can be confirmed via the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an illegal substrate is disposed around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In the present embodiment, as the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 included in the peripheral control substrate 1510, which are surface-mounted and have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, a type of weak directivity is adopted. It is also suitable for use as lighting. Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of cover flat 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form a two space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of the cover flat 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 135) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back of the cover flat And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 135) having a distance dimension of two predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment). In the first space 1505a, as described above, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and various electronic components and the like provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this manner can be brightly illuminated by lighting up the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 that is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a luster, and the area of the back surface of shield flat plate 1540 a of shield plate 1540 made of metal facing the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 respectively. The light emitting diode also has a function as a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and directing the light back to the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the periphery thereof. These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a colored paint having gloss.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the peripheral control unit 1500 is located near the game board 5, and a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5. As a result, the gaming balls rub against each other in the ball path configured by these components, and become charged by electrostatic charging, which becomes a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball. The pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment which is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a nonconductive resin, and are formed in the inner space of the cover body 1501. Then, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is held between the cover 1501 and various substrates. By adopting the structure described above, a configuration is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates to provide a circuit ground. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the grounds of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. By electrically connecting to the (GND) line, the same ground (GND) was adopted.

  Thus, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the body 1502 is used as a circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540. Ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530, power supply The ground (GND) of the substrate 630, and the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 86 (b) can be removed by leading to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the body 1502 can be guided and removed from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall as a circuit ground called a circuit ground through the metal shield plate 1540.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, in the vicinity of the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 above the game board 5, and the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. In the state where peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of rear display 3000 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000, special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 An inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided in 1520 and an inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are disposed near the center of the ball tank 552 So that they can be placed away from the tank rail 553 You have me. As described above, since the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, the substrate described above By arranging the space connector apart from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the gaming ball B in the space between the above-mentioned connectors.

  Also, an inter-board connector by special connector SCN1 provided in peripheral control board 1510 and special connector SCN3 provided in peripheral data ROM board 1520, special connector SCN2 provided in peripheral control board 1510, and special connector SCN4 provided in liquid crystal output board 1530 A state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) In the above, as shown in FIG. 134, since the arrangement can be made long in the vertical direction, it is possible to minimize the area to which dust, powder having some metallicity or the like adheres. In the case where the above-described inter-board connector is disposed long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallicity or the like adheres is extremely increased. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction, and dust and some metal As described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the connector has a projecting wall whose upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac is a cover plate 1501a. Even if a plug corresponding to CN1 to CN9 is inserted, the plug is hidden and can not protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a Dust attached to the metal, powder with some metallicity, etc. It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. As described above, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is arranged, and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, so that dust, powder having some metallic property and the like can be prevented from adhering to the respective electric terminals. Is selected.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine is provided with an effect control board and the like on which a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc. is stored, a CPU for controlling display devices for displaying various images, etc. It is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. For this reason, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to manufacture by modifying the effect control substrate according to the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control substrate there were.

  Also, conventionally, a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board (effect control means), etc. on which a CPU for controlling display devices for displaying various images is mounted A game machine having the following is proposed (e.g., JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island facilities of the game hall have static electricity as the game balls rub against each other when circulating the island facilities of the game hall and the game machine, so the game ball is a game ball It is necessary to take measures for electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, as shown in FIG. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progression of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the gaming ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received by the first start hole 2002, and the second start detects the game ball B received by the second start hole 2004. A mouth sensor 2511, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting gaming balls B received in the general winning openings 2001, a gate sensor 2301 for detecting gaming balls B passing through the gate portion 2003, and a first winning prize opening 2005 The first large winning opening sensor 2512 for detecting the gaming ball B, the second large winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the second large winning opening 2006, and the illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 3003 and so on are input to the main control I / O port through the main control input circuit.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, whereby the start port solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid Output a drive signal to 2516, or from the main control I / O port, the status indicator of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol indicator, the normal hold indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special hold number indicator, The drive signal is output to the second special symbol display, the second special hold number display, the round display, etc.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first large winning opening sensor 2512, and the second large winning opening sensor 2513 are non-contact type electromagnetic waves. While a proximity switch of the formula is used, a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2511 The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2511 and the gate sensor 2301, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used.

  Also, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 is opened and the gaming ball B enters frequently. The detection of the game ball B by the first large winning opening sensor 2512 and the second large winning opening sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first large winning opening sensor 2512 and the second large winning opening sensor 2513. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3001.

  In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (gaming information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, etc. To Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control I / O port to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 are supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 633. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The power failure notice signal is input not only to the main control I / O port of the main control MPU but also to the payout control board 633 or the like.

7-2. Disbursement control board]
The payout control board 633 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B is a payout control unit 633a for performing various control relating to the payout, a launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and a launch which performs the sphere feed control by the sphere feed solenoid 145 A control unit 633 b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display.

7-2-1. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 633 is a micro not shown in detail but incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout The apparatus includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in serial mode at the payout control I / O port, or from the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch being inputted to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 and the detection from the ball cut detection sensor 574 A signal, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit.

  A detection signal from the ball-off detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, a detection signal from the discharge detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are payout control via the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control I / O port of the MPU.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 are payout control input circuits. , And is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the payout control I / O to the payout motor 584 through the payout motor drive circuit, or displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. Output signal from the payout control I / O port to the error LED indicator, or send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control I / O port to the main control board 1310 in serial mode Or, the number of balls of the gaming ball B actually paid out is output from the payout control I / O port to the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 633), and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is cut off) Informing that there is no gaming ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B gets caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 and notifies that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, "Count "It is a switch error" (specifically, it is informed that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed "Retry error" (specifically, notification that the number of payout retries has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full" (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the far cover unit 150 indicates that the game ball is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. At the same time, it informs that it is "CR not connected" (in other words, it indicates that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the gaming ball B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU . Further, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent gaming balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining degree to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is the ball lending unit It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633 b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not illustrated in detail, the emission control unit 633 b is provided with an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for firing the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the above, a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit so that 100 gaming balls B per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. And generating a ball-sending reference pulse by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputting the generated pulse to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not the palm or finger touches the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player The detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects the signal is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the drive current for shooting the game ball B toward the game area 5a with the launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, the firing reference pulse In response to the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit is a game ball stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side send. Thus, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  Note that various voltages (DC + 35 V, DC + 12 V, and DC + 5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control substrate 633. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progression of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, etc. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, control ROM 1510b for storing various programs and various schedule data that prescribes progression of effects, and various data stored in peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 Control information (peripheral data) can be transferred and stored, an SDRAM 1510 c composed of SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 15 10 c 2, a slide type volume adjustment switch 15 10 d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real time clock not shown. And it includes a backup power supply 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the IC, and a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Examples of various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports and various parallel I / O ports.

  The CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a converts various control information (peripheral data) stored in peripheral data ROM 1520a included in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when power is turned on (including when power is restored from a power failure). Control to transfer. Between the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, as described above, the transfer rate of 2 Gbps is provided, so the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is sent to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is transferred at high speed. As control information (peripheral data), as described above, the background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, character images, image data such as symbol images, etc., the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data defining the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 or game It is drive data or the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided on the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a to temporarily store information or delete the information associated with processing. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system, it reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and proceeds with rendering. .

  Further, when the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from main control board 1310, it reads and reads various schedule data stored in control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. According to the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, or the light emission mode of various LEDs matched to various effects As described above, various effects are advanced by performing control or performing control such that sounds such as music and sound effects flow according to various effects.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600, and generates the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Control to output. The drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 or the like by reading, generating and outputting sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a Control is performed such that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. When the slide type volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume control operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker Outputs audio signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to 464 and the body frame speaker 622 for low frequency of the body frame 4 By doing this, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound presentation) than ever before.

  When the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from main control board 1310, it reads out various schedule data stored in control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and reads out the schedule data Along with the game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various serial I From the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, game board side drive data for transmitting a drive signal to the drive motor for transmitting to each decoration substrate of the game board 5 from the / O port or operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 Read out from various serial I / O ports A door for transmitting a drive signal to an operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and an operation button elevation drive motor 367 etc., for transmitting to each drive substrate for driving the drive motor and / or drive solenoid Door-side drive light emission composed of the side drive data and the lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, the door side light emission data for outputting the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal Data are read from the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2 and transmitted from the various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 are peripheral control inputs It is received by the various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a through the circuit. A detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by the various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a through the circuit. In addition, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510. Among the various voltages from the power supply substrate 630, the power supply generation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 has a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC +12 V) The type is created and supplied.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a diagnoses whether or not its own system is runaway using the external WDT.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 86 is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 is a view showing the configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 138 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 138 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 138 (d) is a table showing a description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the frame ground board 559 is in a state where the mounting surface is downward (that is, in a state where the connector insertion ports of the earth terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are downward). It is accommodated in and attached to the inside of the substrate accommodation portion 551aa formed on the top plate portion 551a of the delivery base 551 shown in FIG. 86 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, ECN2 arranged in a line from the right to the left along the upper side, and the center of the left side A lower ground terminal ECN3 is disposed. To briefly describe the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. 138 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 is provided as an interface ground on the interface board 635 in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The connection terminal and the interface ground wire are electrically connected via the ground terminal ECN2. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected via the ground connection terminal at the island facility of the game hall and the island equipment ground wire as an island facility ground. The earth terminal ECN3 is illustrated as a ball tank ground on the ball tank 552 (specifically, on the outside of the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodation portion 551aa) shown in FIG. 86 (b). This ball tank is attached with one end of the ball tank ground wire by a metal screw The other end of the source wire is electrically connected, and the earth terminal ECN 4 is a metal body frame reinforcing frame in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 81 as the body frame metal ground. One end of a main frame metal ground wire is attached to a 530 (specifically, the upper side of the main frame reinforcement frame 530) by a metal screw not shown, and the other end of the main frame metal ground wire is electrically connected The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal provided on the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 as a power supply ground via the power supply ground wire. .

  The circuit of the frame earth substrate 559 is, as shown in FIG. 138 (c), the earth terminal ECN3 as a ball tank earth is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 is as a power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are electrically connected to each other, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. The other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 as a power ground, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In the present embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  Electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN1 as interface ground is led to the ground of the game hall island equipment via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire and removed, and the earth as the ball tank earth The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the terminal ECN3 is led to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment earth wire and removed, and flows to the ground terminal ECN4 as the main frame metal ground The electromagnetic wave noise is led to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire and removed, and the electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN5 as the power ground is the island equipment The game terminal via the earth terminal ECN2 as an earth and the island equipment earth wire It is adapted to be removed is guided to the ground of the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 82, a ball tank 552, a dispensing unit 560, and the like are attached to the dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island facility of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are polished at the island facility of the game hall, rub against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to release electromagnetic wave noise. For this reason, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of retaining the game ball B and the payout unit 560 are attached and in the periphery thereof.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity tends to collect, and as a result of the static electricity easily accumulating, the ball tank 552 and the payout are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground board 559, a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground, and a main frame metal, as opposed to the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the unit 560. Electromagnetic wave noise is gradually flowed and attenuated through the resistors ER1 and ER2 as the earth terminal ECN4 as the ground to suppress instantaneous discharge of high voltage, and the island equipment from the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth It is possible to lead to the ground of island facilities of the game hall through the earth wireIn other words, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated is from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground of a frame ground. By leading to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic wave noise which has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed.

  On the other hand, when electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the metal shield plate 1540 housed in the peripheral control substrate box 1505 shown in FIG. 132, the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are obtained. Intrudes into the ground (GND) line and flows into the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630, and from the ground connection terminal of the power supply substrate 630 to the ground terminal ECN5 as a power ground on the frame ground substrate 559 via the power supply ground wire. The current flows from the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility earth wire and is removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the body 1502 is led as a circuit ground called circuit ground from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the metal shield plate 1540, thereby the cover body of the peripheral control unit 1500 The electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the base body 1502 can be eliminated by flowing to the ground of the island facility of the game hall.

  In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main frame metal ground are strongly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise as described above. As it corresponds to (the surroundings), a large-sized ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground is, as described above, the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the frame ground board 559 into the game hall A large ground terminal is adopted because it leads to the ground of the island equipment and removes it. Ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 adopting this large-sized ground terminal are square with a cross-sectional shape of one side of 1.14 mm, rated current: 7A (when using AC · DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250 V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and its height is 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. 138 (a) (ground terminals ECN2 to When the housing corresponding to ECN 4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 and the current is smaller. For the earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small earth terminals are adopted. Earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting this small earth terminal have a square cross section with a side of 0.64 mm, rated current: 3 A (when using AC · DC, AWG # 22), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250 V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and its height is 7 mm as shown in FIG. 138 (a) (ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 The mounting height is 9.8 mm when the corresponding housing is inserted).

  In the present embodiment, respective ground wires (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic wave noise is large compared to the respective ground wires (interface ground wire, power ground wire), the respective ground wires (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The thickness of the ground wire and the body frame ground wire is thicker than the thickness of each of the ground wires (interface ground wire and power ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138A, 1.6 mm is employed as the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559.

  As described above, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places can be collected on the frame earth substrate 559 temporarily and then guided from the frame earth substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed, the frame earth The substrate 559 has a function of exerting a charge removing function.

  In addition, the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places can be collected on the frame ground substrate 559 temporarily and led from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. Ground wires (wirings) from the ball tank 552 disposed on the upper side are routed around the power supply substrate 630 disposed on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and electromagnetic noises are once collected on the power substrate 630 to As compared with the configuration of leading to the ground and removing it, routing of the ground wire (wiring) is extremely easy.

  Further, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be disposed in the substrate accommodation portion 551aa of the dispensing base 551 in a state where they are close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 Terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, ten external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a line from the left to the right when viewed from the rear side from the dispensing base unit 550)) And electrically connecting the hall computer provided in the game hall with a wire, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground in the frame ground board 559, and a ground connection terminal provided in the island facility in the game hall , Electrically connected with the island equipment ground wire (wiring), and can be performed as a series of work Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  Further, since the frame ground substrate 559 can be disposed in the substrate accommodation portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 and the island facility of the game hall Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 which controls the progress of the game, such as the main control unit 1300 which controls the progress of the game) Peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the peripheral control board, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like). It is possible to eliminate the adverse effect on electronic parts (including connectors) provided in

  Also, by arranging the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated, the body tank 4 is in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground in the frame ground board 559, respectively. Make the length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) that is electrically connected extremely short, and guide the electromagnetic wave noise from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and remove it. Can.

  Also, by arranging the frame ground board 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated, the ball tank 552 where static electricity is easily accumulated and the frame ground board 559 which exerts a diselectrifying action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main frame metal ground wire (wiring) for electrically connecting the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 which exerts the charge removing function, and the power source An interface electrically connecting a length of a power supply ground wire (wiring) electrically connecting the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 which exerts a static elimination function, and an interface electrically connecting the interface substrate 635 and a frame ground substrate 559 It can be configured to be shortest as compared with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  Also, by arranging the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated, the body tank 4 is in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are used for the metal frame main frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500. Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, and the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected, and the ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 Lead to the ground of island facilities of the game hall via earth wire and remove Can.

  By the way, conventionally, as disclosed in the prior art, each earth is once concentrated on the power supply substrate disposed on the CR unit side of the lower part of the main frame so as to easily supply 24 V AC power of the CR unit. A gaming machine has been proposed which is connected to the ground of an island facility and grounded (e.g., Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69)). Since the power supply substrate is generally heavy, it is often disposed below in the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to collect the ground on the power supply substrate, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the ball device on the upper side of the gaming machine to the lower power supply substrate. By routing the earth wire in this manner, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing along the way and have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is concentrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs in the power supply board, the earth may be affected, or the current may flow to the ground line, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, in the case where the ground point of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to extend and connect the ground wires aggregated by the power supply board from the lower side to the upper side again.

[9. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply substrate 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 139 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate, FIG. 140 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply substrate, FIG. 141 is a view on arrow B of FIG. FIG. 143 shows silk printing (part 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate. Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate will be described, and subsequently, a method of identifying electronic components of the same shape and confirmation of blowout of a fuse will be described.

  As described above, there is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 V is stepped down to the power supply voltage of the gaming machine AC 24 V. When the plug of the power supply wiring (not shown) is inserted into the AC 24V power supply outlet which is the power supply voltage of the gaming machine island equipment, AC 24V is supplied to the power supply substrate 630. The power supply substrate 630 creates various power supplies (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from AC 24 V supplied from the island facility of the game hall and supplies them from the power substrate 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1 doing.

9-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 139, the circuit of the power supply substrate 630 mainly includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, and a power destruction circuit 630g. It is done.

  AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power supply wiring (not shown). When AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power supply line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube of 5 mm in diameter and 20 mm in length) (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630 a via the type B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety Act). Specifically, 24V AC line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1") is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a, and the AC 24V line 2 is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. (Hereafter, "AC24V2" is described.) Is input. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise reduction circuit 630b.

  When a staff member of a game hall or the like turns on the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V1 goes to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise reduction circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply start, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V2 is supplied to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise reduction circuit 630b. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by the ON operation of the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member of a game hall or the like turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically disconnected from each other, and the AC 24V1 becomes to the various circuits of the power supply board 630. While the supply is cut off, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of 24V AC to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 is cut off. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by the OFF operation of the power switch 630a.

  In the state where the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned ON, the attendant of the game hall clerk etc. turns ON the breaker of the game hall to set up the pachinko machine in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, and by turning off the breaker of the game hall, the power shutoff of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be performed all at once.

[9-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise reduction circuit 630b includes a common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, which is a circuit for common mode noise reduction, a normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, which is a circuit for normal mode noise reduction, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and their varistor voltages are the same. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that could not be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via power switch 630a, the other end of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor C2, and the other end of capacitor C2 is AC24V2 via power switch 630a It is electrically connected. Further, one end of varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC 24 V1 through power switch 630a, the other end of varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of varistor ZNR2, and the other end of varistor ZNR2 is It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, the one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 138 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

  The normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 is for removing normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that can not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 through the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 through the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 through the power switch 630a.

  AC 24 V 1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630 a is input to the choke coil L 1 through the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC and the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC and is input to the power supply line connector DCN 2 as AC 24 VA, AC 24 V 2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630 a is input to the choke coil L 1 through the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC and the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC and is input to the power supply line connector DCN 2 as AC 24 V . The choke coil L1 is a component for preventing common mode noise of 24 V AC and 24 V AC, and prevents noise interference. The power supply line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the power supply line for interface board not shown, the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 98, and the power supply line for CR unit not shown. The unit is electrically connected to a non-CR unit and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to the not-shown CR unit.

  AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630 c.

[9-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a zener diode.

  The AC 24V1 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L 1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D 2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q 2 via the peripheral circuit 630 ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2 And 2 respectively. The package types of the FET Q1, FET Q2, Schottky barrier diode D1 and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and fixed to the radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 140). ing. The heat dissipating fins HS1 are soldered to and fixed to the power supply substrate 630 and are thereby grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630.

  As described above, AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the anode terminals of the diodes D 5 and D 6 in addition to the rectifier circuit 630 c, and cathode terminals of the diodes D 5 and D 6. Are respectively output to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[9-1-3. Power factor improvement circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630 d includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q 3 and Q 4 and a peripheral circuit 630 da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

  The direct current whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are directly output without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Are input to The gate terminals of the power factor improvement circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit are input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is switched by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to suppress the generation of harmonics and improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 Each is output from. The package types of FETs Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of FETs Q1 and Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above) It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 140). The heat dissipating fins HS2 are connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply substrate 630.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[9-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminal of each of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor receives a direct current whose power factor is improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d. Smoothing circuit 630e smoothes (smoothens) the pulse current from direct current whose power factor is improved by power factor correction circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of power supply generation circuit 630f, as well as fuse FUSE3 (this embodiment). In form, it is the same shape as fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2, diameter: 5mm, length: through transparent glass tube (support terminals of both ends are metal made, B class melting specified by the Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety Act) Then, the power supply substrate 630 is supplied to each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 as direct current + 35V. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE 3 is a +35 V power supply line of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-5. Power supply creation circuit]
When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply generation circuit 630f generates DC +12 V and DC +5 V from the input DC. The power supply generation circuit 630f outputs the generated DC +12 V from the +12 V terminal and supplies it from the power supply substrate 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the generated DC +5 V from the +5 V terminal to output pachinko machine from the power substrate 630 1 Supply to each substrate inside. The power supply line supplied from the +12 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f becomes the +12 V power supply line of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is +5 V of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1 It becomes a power supply line.

  The power supply generation circuit 630f controls switching of the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor correction circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by performing control to output a gate signal for power factor correction from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor correction circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power supply generation circuit 630 f, AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the AC-DET terminal through the diodes D 5 and D 6. The power supply generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether to output a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power supply wiring (not shown) is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet for the gaming machine of the island equipment of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet for the commercial power source voltage higher than AC 24V for the gaming machine When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than +35 V DC is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The power supply generation circuit 630 f has a value at which the magnitude of the power supply voltage is predetermined based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L 1 input to the AC-DET terminal (threshold: present embodiment) Then, when the voltage reaches approximately 50 V), it is possible to output the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  When the power supply generation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit 630g to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode, when the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied via the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By rapidly flowing toward the CGND terminal of the formation circuit 630f, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted.

  The GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630 f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 to which the GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded is the ground (GND) line of each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 have one end electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the.

  In the power supply destruction circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates to drain to source terminals As a large current flows toward it (the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, and the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 conduct is maintained. Be done. The FET Q5 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above), but the FET Q1 is Unlike Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10, they are disposed at positions not in contact with the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is disposed between the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 and is not fixed at all to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 (see FIGS. 140 and 141). This is intended to absorb and cool the heat through the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are not broken by heat generation. In contrast to this, FET Q5 is short-circuited by heat generation when FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 become an overcurrent) It is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  In other words, the plug of the power supply wiring is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet for the gaming machine of the island equipment of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet for the commercial power source voltage higher than AC 24V for the gaming machine. When inserted, power supply generation circuit 630 f sets the value of the power supply voltage to a predetermined value based on the power supply voltage of which common mode noise is reduced by choke coil L 1 input to the AC-DET terminal. In this embodiment, when the voltage reaches approximately 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to be self-destructed. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the ON operation is performed, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied with the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 in the short mode in the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By rapidly flowing toward the CGND terminal, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted, only the power supply substrate 630 is destroyed, and the plug of the power supply wiring is commercial Power supply voltage AC Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 00V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines on the island facilities of the game hall, and mistakenly into the AC 100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC 24V that is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. When it is inserted and the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g is destroyed, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced, and the plug of the power cord is plugged into the AC 24V power outlet which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines on island facilities of the game hall Since the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is already broken and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g In short mode in When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f via the FET Q5 in the state, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted again. It becomes. That is, unless the power supply substrate 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power substrate 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord is pachinko machine equipment Even if it is plugged into the AC 24 V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage, it is impossible to start playing the game.

9-2. Method of identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method of identifying an electronic component having the same shape and mounted on the power supply substrate 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c and the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky of the power factor improvement circuit 630d. The package types in the barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g are the same type (TO-220F), and the shapes of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 are also the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, length Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal)).

  Although FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different types of electronic components, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that can not be destroyed, and FET Q5 is the only electronic component that can be destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, electrons which are the only one of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are broken. In order to facilitate identification of the components, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 is adopted which has features different from those of the other.

  Specifically, for FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components not to be destroyed, a white outline is shown as shown in FIG. 142 (a). Lines and thick white lines indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged, as silk printing, for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, for silk printing TSL K 1 to 4 and FETs Q1, Q 2, Q 3 and Q 4 The TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. White thick lines are fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 140, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other in order to fix them to radiation fins HS1 and HS2. HS2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so as to be in an arrangement in which the silk printing of the white outline and the white thick line part of the silk printing TSLK1 to 8 are arranged.

  On the other hand, for the FET Q5 which is the only electronic component to be broken, as shown in FIG. Silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, and ad1 and a thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 have the same shape, silk printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 Of the TSLKs 1 to 9, by visually observing the white hatched ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern, an electronic component of the different types of electronic components having the same shape is focused on compared with other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component to be. Thus, it is possible to very easily identify which electronic component is the only one to be destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape.

  In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs FETQ 5 to a clerk in the game hall by telephone, a silk-printed TSLK 9 having a white hatched ad 1 represented as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search for a person in charge at the game hall, the person in charge at the game hall can grasp the position of the FET Q 5 properly, so it is easy to communicate between the person in charge at the service center and the person in charge at the game hall. Become.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs FETQ 5 by telephone to the clerk of the game hall or the like, the clerk of the game hall or the like is as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. Of the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, the target FET Q5 can be identified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the FET Q5 to be noted can be identified from the other electronic components FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, as described above, are completely different electronic parts, while the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are identical. Although it is a kind of electronic component, AC100V is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V which is a power supply voltage for game machines, because the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power supply outlet which is a power supply voltage for game machines in the game hall If it is accidentally inserted into the power supply outlet, as described above, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed to maintain the short mode, and a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2 to cause one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Will melt. That is, as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are destroyed after the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electronic component having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the electronic component to be destroyed among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 can be easily identified. The adopted silk printing has features different from other ones.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143 (a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not broken even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is white. The silk-screened FSLK 1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk-screened outlines.

  On the other hand, FIG. 143 (b) shows fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 which are electronic components which are destroyed as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, with the white outline and the area ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly coated in white. That is, the area ad2 solidly painted in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 are soldered to the power supply substrate 630 with a support bracket (not shown) respectively, they are solidly painted in white in the region between the inner area of the white outline and the periphery of the support bracket. The area ad2 can be viewed visually, and the area ad2 which is the inside area of the white outline and which is transparent to the transparent glass tube except the ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and which is solidly coated in white ad2 is transparent It is possible to be reliably observed through a transparent glass tube.

  Thus, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLKs 1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 By visually observing the solidly coated area ad2, among electronic components of the same type having the same shape, it is possible to identify which electronic component is an electronic component to be watched in comparison with other electronic components It has become. As a result, it is extremely easy to determine which electronic component of the same type of electronic components having the same shape is an electronic component showing a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is the commercial power supply voltage. Can be identified.

  In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall clerk or the like to use the fuse FUSE 1 or FUSE 2, the area painted solid white is displayed as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search silk printing FSLK 2 and 3 having ad 2, it is possible for a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like to accurately grasp the positions of fuses FUSE 1 and FUSE 2. It becomes easy to communicate with the clerks and other staff.

  Thus, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1 instructs Hughes FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 by phone to the clerk of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall clerk is the person in charge of the service center Among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, it is possible to specify the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noted, as instructed by the above. Therefore, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noticed among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component.

9-3. Confirmation of melting of fuse]
Next, confirmation of melting of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 of the same type and mounted on the power supply substrate 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals of both ends are made of metal), and when melted, the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tube are disconnected and the transparent glass tube is disconnected Soot adheres to the inside of Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3, as described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components capable of showing a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage. If the plug of the power cord is accidentally plugged into a 100 V AC power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage, it will melt. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 described above are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing on the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that the fused fuse lines can be easily confirmed. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 correspond to the transparent glass tubes except for the fuse FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 except that the white solid area ad 2 is expressed as a characteristic pattern. By visually observing the area ad2 solidly coated in white through a transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  As a result, a staff of a game hall clerk or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) operates the plug of the power cord for supplying the pachinko machine 1 with the power supply voltage. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 by turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply substrate 630 by plugging in the AC 100 V power outlet, which is not a commercial power supply voltage, accidentally, the fuse FUSE1, FUSE2 Among them, the fuse wire stored in one or both of the transparent glass tubes is broken, and the soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube, so a staff member such as a game clerk or a worker etc. Even if the plug is plugged into a power outlet, the power can not be turned on, so it may not be the initial failure. " Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green is employed as the resist of the power supply substrate 630. Further, in the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk-printed FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. The wiring pattern is not laid out at all in the area of the solid-painted green register corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 (that is, the solid-painted green register corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of (1), no wiring pattern is formed at all in this area). This is a fuse wire which is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 by visually observing the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 and the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube. The visibility of the state is improved, and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse line can be confirmed.

  The power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is, as described above, through the interface board power supply line not shown, the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 98, and the CR unit power supply line not shown. It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1 and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, in addition to the function as means for relaying various signals, the interface board 635 also has a function as means for supplying power to the CR unit (not shown). The interface substrate 635 is a fuse FUSE (in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (the support terminals at both ends are made of metal), Class B melting specified by the Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety Act) The silkscreen shown in FIG. 143 (a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply substrate 630 described above is printed on the mounting surface. A green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown). The wiring pattern is not laid out at all in the area of the solid green register corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown (that is, the solid glass corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown) The wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of the green register, so no wiring pattern is formed at all in this area). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing, through the transparent glass tube, the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown and the corresponding solid green register area By improving the visibility of the state of the fuse line, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface substrate 635 can be configured to be provided on one of AC 24 VA and AC 24 V supplied from the power supply line connector DCN 2 of the power supply substrate 630, and configured to be provided on both of them. It can also be done.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with power supply means capable of creating various power supplies necessary for the gaming apparatus based on an external power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine (e.g., JP-A-2014-008221) Gazette (Fig. 2) By the way, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the game machine directs a particular part of the power supply means to a staff member such as a salesperson in the game hall by telephone, There is a problem that it is difficult to identify a component to be noted among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

[10. Each decoration board provided in the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 144 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame, FIG. 145 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 146 is an LED 147 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration substrate including two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. It is the enlarged view seen. Here, the electrical connection between each decoration substrate and the frame door sub relay substrate provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decoration substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current An arrangement method of the drive circuit will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 encloses the outer periphery of the door window 101a as described above, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side The in-window decoration 410b of the in-window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are disposed, and the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish The dish lower left decoration 281, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish center lower decoration 312 b are disposed below the upper center decoration 312 a.

  Behind the upper left decorative body 271, the upper left decorative substrate 273 formed in a strip shape extending in the left and right direction along the upper left decorative body 271 is disposed, and a plurality of the upper left decorative substrates 273 are mounted The light emitting decoration is performed by the full color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the upper right decoration 276, a plurality of upper right decoration boards 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the upper right decoration 276 are disposed, and a plurality of the upper right The light emitting decoration is performed by the full color LEDs (five in the present embodiment). The dish center upper decoration body 314a is disposed behind the dish center upper decoration board 314 which is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center upper decoration board A plurality of full color LEDs (10 in the present embodiment) mounted on a plurality of LEDs 314 are used to emit light.

  The left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the left side lower decoration substrate 402b are formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending upward and downward along the door frame left side decoration 404 at the rear thereof. A full-color LED (in the present embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is disposed on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). 5) and 10 on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b). A plurality of side window inner decoration portions 410b are arranged in a row in the vertical direction of the side window inner decoration members 412, and formed in the back thereof in the form of an elongated strip extending vertically along the side window inner decoration members 412. The in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 is disposed, and light emission decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (12 in the present embodiment) mounted in plurality on the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the upper and lower direction along the door frame right side decorative body 419 behind the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A full-color LED (in this embodiment, the right side upper decorative substrate 418a is disposed on the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b). 4) and 10 on the lower right side decoration substrate 418b).

  Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 is disposed. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending right and left along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is disposed, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 A door frame top right decorative substrate 457 formed in a long narrow strip shape is disposed, and a plurality of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are mounted. Light emitting decoration by full color LEDs (in the present embodiment, 11 in the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, 7 in the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, 6 in the door frame top right decoration substrate 457) It is.

  On the back of the lower left decorative body 281, a lower left decorative substrate 283 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending along the lower left decorative body 281 is disposed, and a plurality of the lower left decorative substrates 283 are mounted The light emitting decoration is performed by the full color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The dish lower right decoration 286 is disposed behind the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 which is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending along the dish lower right decoration 286. The light emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full color LEDs (six in this embodiment) mounted on a plurality of light emitting diodes. The dish center lower decoration body 312b is disposed behind the dish center lower decoration board 316 which is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decoration body 312b. A plurality of full color LEDs (10 in the present embodiment) mounted on a plurality of LEDs 316 are used to emit light.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 provided in the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 formed in a form in which the annular ring is divided into the front and rear as described above The rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 is a front decoration substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the front side, and a rear decoration substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip plate having a semicircular arc shape on the rear side. , Is composed of. A plurality of rotary operation units 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 are full color LEDs (nine in the present embodiment) mounted on the front decoration substrate 352a and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the rear decoration substrate 352b. In the present embodiment, the light emission decoration is performed by 9).

  Thus, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. Thus, by increasing the distance dimension in the vertical and horizontal directions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices and the like can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body or a large display device can also be provided.

10-1. Electrical connection between each decoration board and frame door sub relay board]
Top left decoration board 273, dish top right decoration board 278, dish top center decoration board 314, left side top decoration board 402a, left side bottom decoration board 402b, side arranged in various decorations and decoration parts provided in the door frame 3. Interior decoration in the window decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, dish lower left decoration board The door frame side decoration substrate such as the plate 283 and the plate lower right decoration substrate 288, the plate center lower decoration substrate 316, the front decoration substrate 352a, and the rear decoration substrate 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the provided door frame sub relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is provided with the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 132 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the door frame side first serial system and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which is the door frame side second serial system which are serially output from There is. In addition, door frame sub relay substrate 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 139 via interface substrate 635 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground of power supply substrate 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub relay board 105 are relays of the tray unit 200 shown in FIG. While being input to the substrate 214, it is input to the handle decoration substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are the dish lower left decoration board 283, the dish lower right decoration board 288, In addition, they are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the lower left decoration substrate 283 are input to the upper left decoration substrate 273. That is, the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected in a beaded manner. Illustration where door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input to the dish lower left decoration board 283 which becomes the bridge board Not shown for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, respectively. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate upper left decorative substrate 283 is connected to the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 electrically (in other words, it is the latter stage of the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 and becomes the final stage). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to be output respectively from the non-output connectors are provided .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower right decoration substrate 288, are input to the upper right decoration substrate 278. That is, the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 is a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a beaded manner. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay substrate 214 are input to the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 serving as a bridge substrate. An input connector (not shown) is provided, as well as an illustration for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 electrically connected with the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 (that is, the final stage of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288) is the plate lower right decoration substrate Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V and ground (GND) to be outputted respectively from the output connectors (not shown) of 288 are provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the operation part relay board 392 of the rendering operation unit 300 are the dish center upper decoration board 314, the dish The lower central decorative substrate 316 and the front decorative substrate 352 a of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are respectively input.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the front decoration substrate 352a are input to the rear decoration substrate 352b. That is, the front decoration substrate 352a is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration substrate 352b. And the rear decorative substrate 352b are electrically connected in a beaded manner. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay substrate 392 of the rendering operation unit 300 are provided on the front decoration substrate 352a which is a bridge substrate. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided and for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration substrate 352b. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) for the front decoration substrate 352a is connected to the rear decoration substrate 352b electrically connected with the front decoration substrate 352a (that is, the rear stage of the front decoration substrate 352a and the final stage). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (the light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1), the direct current +12 V, and the ground (GND) to be output respectively are input is provided.

  Here, for example, a brief description of the lower left decoration board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input Then, the lower left decoration substrate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat dispersion circuit 283c, and six full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to sdLED1 to sdLED6 And the circuit 283 y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (the light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay substrate 214. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 283 x is a sink (suction) type, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing to the sdLED 1 to sdLED 6. Therefore, the heat distribution of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed by receiving a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat dispersion circuit 283c.

  Also, for example, a brief description will be given of the upper left decorative substrate 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are input from the lower left decorative substrate 283. The upper left decoration substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat dispersion circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 and is of sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of supplying a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x performs control to supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decoration substrate 283. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed by receiving a part of heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x by the heat dispersion circuit 273c.

[10-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub relay board 105 are the lower left decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402 While being input to the substrate 402b, the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the right-side lower decoration substrate 418b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Each has been entered.

  The direct current +12 V and the ground (GND) input to the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the upper left decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 has been entered.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 Thus, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a bead. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground from the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 serving as a bridge substrate An input connector (not shown) to which (GND) is input is provided, and a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are provided at the top center of the door frame An output connector (not shown) for outputting each to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. In addition, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, which is electrically connected with the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, follows the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), is an illustration of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) output respectively from output connectors not provided are provided, and input connectors (not shown) are provided. An output connector (not shown) for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is provided. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456. Thus, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a bead. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 which is electrically connected in a row with the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455) Door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) output respectively from the output connector (not shown) of the frame top central decoration substrate 455 (not shown) Only connectors are provided.

  Here, for example, of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are input. Briefly describing the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402 ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273 a of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 and supplies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8 And a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. Take control.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decoration substrate 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273, hdLED9, A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying a constant current to hLED1 and huLED1 to huLED5 which are five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left The maximum current setting circuit 402 bby is capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to the huLED 1 to huLED 5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402 a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is a substrate (left side lower decoration substrate 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. The constant current is controlled to flow to the hLED1 9, the hdLED 10, and the huLED 1 to huLED 5 of the decoration substrate 402 a on the left side.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, so it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing in the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bb generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the hdLED 9, hdLED 10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed by receiving a part of heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. Further, part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left upper side decoration substrate 402a. ing.

  As described above, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can disperse the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax only by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the substrate (the lower left decoration substrate 402b) on which it is mounted. On the other hand, part of heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the substrate (the lower left decoration substrate 402b) on which it is mounted Heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left upper side decoration substrate 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to supply a constant current to huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a which will be a subsequent substrate across the substrate (left side lower decoration substrate 402b) on which it is mounted It is done. For this reason, the work of electrically connecting the substrates of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402 a is necessarily involved. The worker performing this work is that the finger is the connector of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the connector of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a. In order to touch the distributed circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent damage due to static electricity on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402a. Therefore, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, as well as electrostatics. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to

  As described above, the left upper side decoration substrate 402 a receives the direct current +12 V from the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b and the ground (GND), and is fixed to five full color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5. Lines through which current flows are input respectively. As described above, the left upper side decoration substrate 402a includes the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in addition to the five full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402 ac has a function capable of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity, in addition to the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402 bbx.

[10-1-3. Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for specifying a light emission mode, and ID information and the floor It is composed of key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which one of the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127 is to be designated.

10-2. Outline of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, since the LED constant current drive circuits provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are the same circuit, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the lower left decorative substrate 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current of the current to be supplied to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283 y capable of

[10-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, an output channel LR is configured for an LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It is possible to

  The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. Mainly composed.

[10-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of creating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V in this embodiment) used in the constant current drive circuit 283x when DC +12 V from the +12 V power supply line is input. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit. 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283x. Is able to operate.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. There is. This is because if the +5 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 is used, this +5 V power supply line will be routed around the electrical wiring, so the length of the +5 V power supply line supplying DC +5 V becomes longer and noise is generated. It becomes easy to invade. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the +5 V power supply line and the DC +5 V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the external noise may cause the flickering of the LED. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by making the +5 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 unnecessary for the constant current drive circuit 283 x, the noise resistance of the +12 V power supply line is extremely high compared to the +5 V power supply line. In the linear power supply 283xa, a configuration is adopted in which DC +5 V is uniquely generated as the internal power supply Vreg.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the constant current drive circuit 283x only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since this can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. Thereby, by stabilizing the internal power supply Vreg, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of flickering of the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs due to the external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against extraneous noise. Further, the input electrical wiring for the +5 V power supply line and the external transmission electrical wiring are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[10-2-1 b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb generates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are initialized to generate the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi start operation.

  For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. 132, and independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. For example, when using a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as “reset signal transmission line”), the reset signal transmission line may be routed around electric wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal is increased, and noise is likely to intrude. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset due to the influence of the external noise to turn off the LED. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, and the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the constant current drive circuit 283x does not output the internal reset signal RST from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate, but only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. Since external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST by utilizing it, the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to the prevention of unexpected turning off and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against extraneous noise. In addition, the need for the input electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line and the external transmission electrical wiring is eliminated, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[10-2-1 c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283 x c is a line (hereinafter referred to as “data line”) for transmitting serial data from outside of the constant current drive circuit 283 x (here, light emission data SDAT 1 of the first serial frame on the door frame side). Serial data is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the signal for transmitting the serial data is shaped, and can be output to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line for transmitting a clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter referred to as "clock line"). The clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal can be shaped and output to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  The data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards as described above. For this reason, the lengths of the data line and the clock line are both increased, so that noise can easily enter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. Are arranged in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the lengths of the data line and the clock line are both long, the data line and the clock line can be formed that are resistant to noise. Thus, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it can be made strong against extraneous noise.

[10-2-1 d. Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 kinds of addresses as an ID (ID capable of identifying an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistances (not shown) based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa. It can be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not necessary to receive data from software and set it appropriately.

[10-2-1 e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg receives serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial frame on the door frame side) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial frame on the door frame side) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. At this time, control is performed such that the gradation information in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so that the gradation information is taken from the serial data and becomes the taken-in gradation information. If the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 on the door frame side first serial system) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not fetched and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents of the

[10-2-1 f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 from light off to lighting (maximum luminance) The gradation control is performed by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh is provided with PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradations are set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current driving unit 283 xi so that the current having the set gradations flows.

[10-2-1 g. Constant current driver]
The constant current drive unit 283 xi is a constant not shown for one output channel so as to have the gradation set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 provided in the PWM unit 283 xh described above. A constant current is supplied to the LED elements constituting the full color LED by the current driver. That is, the constant current driving unit 283 xi includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

  In the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8, one end of a resistor Rr for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the LED element emitting red (R) constituting the full color LED in eight output channels from output channels LR1 to LR8 It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). In the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16, one end of a resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the green (G) emitting LED element constituting the full color LED in eight output channels from output channels LG1 to LG8 It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). In the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, one end of a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the blue (B) emitting LED element constituting the full color LED in eight output channels from output channels LB1 to LB8 It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element which constitute a full color LED respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 The anode terminal is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and receives +12 V DC.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively correspond to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) 1 to constant current driver 8) electrically connected to each other, and capable of absorbing constant current flowing to a red (R) LED element constituting a full color LED to the side of constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively correspond to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) It is electrically connected to 9 to constant current driver 16), and constant current flowing to the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be absorbed to the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively correspond to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) It is electrically connected to the constant current driver 24), and can sink the constant current flowing to the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb constant current flowing to the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED set individually, thereby constituting the red (R) LED element constituting the full color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 absorb the constant current flowing to the green (G) LED elements configuring the full color LED set individually, thereby absorbing the constant current flowing through the full color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 absorb the constant current flowing to the blue (B) LED elements configuring the full color LED set individually, thereby absorbing the constant current flowing through the full color LED. Can emit light.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full color LEDs, with the individually set constant current, such dimming lighting is possible. Thus, it is possible to perform turn-off, lighting by one gradation, blinking by one gradation, and the like.

10-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the resistor Rr for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the red (R) emitting LED elements constituting the full color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LR1 to LR8 described above, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Configure a full-color LED in eight output channels up to output channels LB1 to LB8, and set a resistance Rg to set the maximum current to flow to the green (G) emitting LED elements that constitute a full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8 It is comprised from resistance Rb which sets the largest electric current sent through to the LED element which light-emits blue (B).

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 provided in the constant current driver 283 xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND) There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 provided in the constant current driver 283 xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND) There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current driver 283 xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND) There is.

10-3. Decorative substrate provided with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decoration substrate provided with the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. Here, a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit mentioned above with which each decoration board of door frame 3 is provided is constituted as the same circuit. Therefore, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are indicated by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 145 and 146 for convenience of explanation.

[10-3-1. Decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decoration substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 145, the dish lower left decoration substrate 283 is an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, thermal A distributed circuit 283c is provided.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the door frame side first serial system are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub relay substrate 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 via the interface substrate 635 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground of the power supply substrate 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the lower left decoration board 283 for the lower left frame of the door frame secondary relay substrate 105 (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) It is input via the tray unit relay board 214. The direct current +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a and constitutes the full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRr1 to sdRr6 It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRg1 to sdRg6 (the The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRb1 to sdRb6 It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are individually controlled to perform dimming control so as to be the captured gradation information.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a generates heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 283c, are responsible for part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  In addition, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub relay board 105 is a dish upper left decoration via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) While being input to the substrate 273, DC +12 V and ground (GND) are input to the upper left decoration substrate 273 via the lower left decoration substrate 283. As a result, the noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x) is not transmitted to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 The waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x).

  The direct current +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a and constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRr1 to suRr6 (the constant currents described above It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRg1 to suRg6 (the constant currents described above The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRb1 to suRb6, respectively It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are individually controlled to perform dimming control so as to be the captured gradation information.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink (suction) type, the LED constant current drive circuit 273a generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, heat dissipation resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 273c, are responsible for part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x). Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

  In addition to the dish lower left decoration board 283 and the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish lower right decoration board 288, the dish upper right decoration board 278, and the door frame top left decoration board 456 as a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. , And a door frame top right decoration substrate 457.

10-3-2. Decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decoration substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, the left side lower decoration substrate 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, hdLED1 that is 10 full color LEDs ~ HdLED 10, a heat distribution circuit 402bc is provided.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. The light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which are the door frame side second serial system are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub relay substrate 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 via the interface substrate 635 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground of the power supply substrate 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decoration substrate 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. There is. The direct current +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb and constitutes the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element , And blue (B) are also input to the anode terminals of the LED elements, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. Therefore, of the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emission aspect is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba for the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two full color LEDs are controlled. The light emission mode of the full color LEDs hdLED 9 and hdLED 10 is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a to be a subsequent substrate, straddling the substrate (that is, the lower left side decoration substrate 402b) on which the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is mounted. The light emission aspect of huLED1-huLED5 is controlled.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 respectively The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (the constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements to be configured are output channels LG1 to LG8 (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are connected to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. It is electrically connected to the above-described constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24).

  Among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 for the two full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are respectively The full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements to be configured are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10 (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 1 described above). Cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to each other and that constitute the full color LEDs hdLED 9 and hdLED 10 are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipating resistors hdRb 9 and hdRb 10, respectively. It is electrically connected to LB1 and LB2 (the constant current driver 17 and the constant current driver 18 described above).

  In addition, red LEDs (huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs) are configured for huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left-side upper decoration substrate 402a that is a subsequent substrate to the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the LED element R) are LED constant current drive circuits 402bb via heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b in the upper left side decoration substrate 402a and heat distribution resistances huRr1a to huRr5a in the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the constant current driver 3 to the constant current driver 7 described above) and that constitute the full-color LEDs huLED Decoration on the left side The output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-described constant current drivers 11 to constant current) The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements electrically connected to the driver 15) and constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the heat dispersion resistance huRb1b to huRb5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, and the left side, respectively. It is electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the constant current driver 19 to the constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRb1a to huRb5a in the lower side decorative substrate 402b. To have. The output channels LR8, LG8 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts from the light emission data SDAT2 Gradation information is controlled, and eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are individually controlled so as to become the acquired gradation information, and dimming is performed. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, the gradation information is taken in from the light emission data SDAT2, and the acquired gradation information is obtained. The remaining two full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are individually controlled to perform dimming and the left side to be a subsequent substrate of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b Upper decoration board 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402 ba is a sink (suction) type, it generates heat by absorbing a constant current flowing to eight hdLED 1 to hdLED 8 among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED 1 to hdLED 10 Do. Therefore, heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc, are responsible for part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, it sinks constant current flowing to two hdLEDs 9 and hdLEDs 10 out of 10 full color LEDs hdLED 1 to hdLED 10, and Heat is generated by absorbing a constant current flowing to huLED1 to huLED5 which are five full color LEDs mounted on the left upper side decoration substrate 402a which is a substrate subsequent to the lower side decoration substrate 402b. Therefore, part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) for two hdLEDs 9 and hdLEDs 10 among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat dispersive circuit 402bc is composed of five elements mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a which is a heat dispersion resistance hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10 and is a subsequent substrate of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. For the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, the heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and the left side on the left side, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc in the lower left decoration substrate 402b The heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in the decoration substrate 402a, enable the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, constant current drive circuit 402bbx) It is possible to disperse the heat.

  Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generation of the above, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  In addition to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b as the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, the upper central dish decoration substrate 314, the lower central dish decoration substrate 316, the in-side window decorative portion decoration substrate 413, the right side There is a lower decorative substrate 418 b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the decoration board 402a on the left side, there is a decoration board 418a on the right side as a decoration board which is not provided with the LED constant current drive circuit at all.

10-4. Arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Here, the constant current drive circuit that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. Surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) as the type of IC package of the constant current drive circuit And so-called VQFN. Among the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is the input side, and the remaining three end sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. In FIG. 148, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

  As described above, each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit in each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the upper and lower direction provided with two LED constant current drive circuits The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[10-4-1. Left side lower decoration board]
As shown in FIG. 147 (a), the left side lower decoration substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the like. The ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb , It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the electrical wiring is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and the LED non-mounting of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub relay board 105 and the electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

  A white resist is uniformly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b has a reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Can be raised.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b, a part number corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing It has not been. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the substrate management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist. This prevents the decrease of the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 by the part number and the area indicating the position to be arranged, and a part number having no relation to the game for the player at all. , And the area indicating the position to be arranged is prevented from being viewed by the player.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the substrate management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is formed as a foil-removed character (that is, a removed character in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). The uncovered characters are covered with a white resist which is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b.

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, and various dispersions on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and a region indicating positions where these electronic parts are arranged are printed as silk printing by yellow solid lines not shown. In addition, in the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b, a region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left lower lower decoration substrate 402b They are respectively printed by LSLK1 to LSLK10.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid ground in which a region other than land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic components and connectors is grounded to ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes not shown. There is.

  As described above, since the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is The width dimension from the left end side 402beg1 to the right end side 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b becomes extremely short, let's take out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge Even in this case, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance dimension, it becomes difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged at the end .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the lower end side of the right of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. By arranging the terminal on the input side closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be the terminal on the side, the terminal frame on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2 shown in FIG. ), DC (+12 V), ground (GND), resistances Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left end, upper left end and upper right end are mainly output terminal 1 to output side. And the terminals of the output side 1 to the terminals of the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. The terminal 1 on the output side has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output 2 and the output 3 have a terminal to which a ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. While being able to arrange as a state, it is possible to arrange so that the remaining two end sides are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Thus, from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are restricted by the minimum distance dimension. You can even pull out all the wiring patterns. Therefore, in the left side lower decoration substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, there are four full color LEDs consisting of group 1 consisting of four full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 and four full color LEDs Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be disposed between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the groups 1 and 2 can be extended. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in any one of the group 1 and the group 2, and therefore, the art It is possible to increase the efficiency of the arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern in the work.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be used in the middle portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b (hdLED 6 which is full color LED in FIG. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be disposed closer to the lower side as compared to the disposed portion), and the central portion in the vertical direction of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b (FIG. 147 (a) (The part where the hdLED 6 which is the full color LED is arranged) is located closer to the upper side, and can be arranged above the hdLED 8 which is the full color LED configured in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax . Thus, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 in the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, and from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx The area for wiring the wiring pattern to the full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided on the two left full color LEDs hdLED9, hdLED10 and five left upper side decoration substrates 402a shown in FIG. It can be secured at 402b.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay, 402bby, capacitors not shown are soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length Length: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are compared with the sizes (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. Very small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, and one end of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the left end side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Capacitors arranged in parallel with 402beg1 and right end side 402beg2 and not shown are such that one end side in the longitudinal direction is perpendicular to left end side 402beg1 and right end side 402beg2 of lower left side decorative substrate 402b It is arranged as. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx arranged with the end of the land pattern inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b and the resistance They are respectively disposed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel.

  In addition, as described above, in the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 to the left end side and the right end side of the decoration substrate. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are substantially identical although they are arranged as inclined. Unlike the other decoration substrates of Frame 3, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are disposed on the door frame top decoration 453 of the decoration substrate Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit can be obtained by using the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in the present embodiment, the end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the end of the decoration substrate, and the end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is not parallel to the end of the decoration substrate. There is a mixture of In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is provided with the other central decorative substrate on which five full color LEDs (not shown) are mounted, in addition to the eleven full color LEDs (not shown). Two LED constant current drive circuits (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, In the second maximum current setting circuit)), an LED constant current drive circuit (here, a second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit))) Through the two heat dispersive circuits (the first constant current circuit is the first heat dispersive circuit (heat dispersive resistor) and the second constant current circuit is the second heat dispersive circuit (heat dispersive resistor)) Direct light emission control, door frame top left decoration The plate 456 has one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit (not shown) having another left decoration substrate on which one full color LED (not shown) is mounted in addition to the seven full color LEDs (not shown) The light emission control is directly controlled via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided for itself (not shown) by the circuit, maximum current setting circuit, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 is added to six full color LEDs provided for itself. The other right decoration substrate on which two full color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is provided for itself by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided for itself (not shown) 1 Direct light emission control via two heat dispersion circuits (heat dispersion resistors). The other central decorative substrate is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative substrate is a left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decoration substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending leftward and rightward along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide heat dissipating circuits (heat dissipating resistors) on each of the other central decorative substrates, the other left decorative substrates, and the other right decorative substrates. As described above, the heat dispersion circuit (here, the second heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) provided on the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other central decoration substrate are the door frame top In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generation of the second LED constant current drive circuit (precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative substrate 455 itself, it prevents damage to electronic parts due to static electricity It also has features that can be done. Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit provided on the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other left decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuits provided on the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit, the function of preventing damage to the electronic component due to static electricity is also included. Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit provided on the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other right decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuits provided on the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 (correctly In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit, the function of preventing damage to the electronic component due to static electricity is also included.

  Also, ten full color LEDs are arranged with the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. The hdLED1 to hdLED10 are viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b and closer to the right end 402beg2 of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b. And the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. L of left side lower decoration board 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are sink (suction) types, and generate heat by absorbing a constant current flowing to each LED element. For this reason, even in the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx and the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less susceptible to the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  Also, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit The end of the land pattern of 402bax and 402bbx is disposed parallel to the left and right sides of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457), the one which arranges the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx nonparallel to the left end side and the right end side of the decoration substrate is the decoration substrate The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the game board 5.

10-4-2. Dish center top decoration board]
The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, and hLED1 to hLED10, which are ten full color LEDs, as shown in FIG. 147 (b). While ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate decorative plate 314 on the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300, the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314 b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 on the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300. When the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 147 (b) is viewed rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is actually disposed along the dish center upper decoration body 312a Connector HCN is mounted on the right side along the upper edge 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314, for connecting the operation part relay substrate 392 and the electrical wiring.

  A white resist is uniformly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decoration substrate 314. In this embodiment, a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 causes the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light forward (that is, the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300) It is possible to increase the reflectance of the

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing It has not been. In addition, the substrate management number of the upper center dish decoration board 314 is not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper dish base decoration board 314 as a white letter with a white resist. This prevents the decrease of the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 by the part number and the area indicating the position to be arranged, and a part number having no relation to the game for the player at all. , And the area indicating the position to be arranged is prevented from being viewed by the player.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration board 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decoration board 314 is formed as a foil-free character (that is, an omission character in a layer on which a wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)) The uncovered characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314.

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 314 ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314 a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314 ay, and various dispersions Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and a region indicating positions where these electronic parts are arranged are printed as silk printing by yellow solid lines not shown. Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is not illustrated as silk printing. The dashed lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 are printed respectively.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid ground in which a region other than land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic parts and connectors is grounded to ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes not shown. There is.

  As described above, since the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 147 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left When viewed (that is, in a state where the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is actually disposed along the dish center upper decoration 312a), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 The width dimension to the maximum is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center decoration substrate 314, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged. Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper center decoration board 314 becomes extremely short, let's draw the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge Even in this case, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance dimension, it becomes difficult to extract all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged at the end .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. Adopted the configuration.

  In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the left lower end side of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is an input as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decoration plate 314. The terminal on the input side is arranged on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1 shown in FIG. 144) by arranging it near the upper end side 314eg1 of the upper center decoration plate 314 so as to be the terminal on the side ), DC (+12 V), ground (GND), resistances Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end side, upper right end side and lower right end side are mainly output terminal 1 to output side And the terminals of the output side 1 to the terminals of the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. The terminal 1 on the output side has terminals to which the resistors Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314 ay and 314 by are input, and the output 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the upper center decoration substrate 314. While being able to arrange as a state, it is possible to arrange as the state which inclined the remaining 2 edge sides 45 degree vis-a-vis lower edge side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decoration baseplate 314. Thus, from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are restricted by the minimum distance dimension. You can even pull out all the wiring patterns. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 formed in a thin strip shape having a semicircular arc shape.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, the group 1 including four full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and four full color LEDs Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be disposed between the group 2 composed of hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the groups 1 and 2 can be extended. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in any one of the group 1 and the group 2, and therefore, the art It is possible to increase the efficiency of the arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, when the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 147 (b) is viewed rotated 90 degrees to the left (in other words, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is on the dish center). 147. A state in which the constant current drive circuit 314 ax is actually disposed along the decorative body 312 a), and a full-color LED in a semicircular arc central portion (FIG. 147 (b)) The constant current drive circuit 314bx can be disposed closer to the right side as compared to the portion where the hLED 6 is disposed, and the semicircular arc central portion (FIG. 147 (b Group which is controlled to emit light by the constant current drive circuit 314 It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Thus, it is possible to secure an area for drawing wiring patterns from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 in the upper center decoration plate 314 of the plate, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx It is possible to secure on the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 a region for drawing a wiring pattern to the two full color LEDs hLED 9 and hLED 10.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, capacitors (not shown) are soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length Length: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors not shown are compared with the sizes (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx. Very small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, and one end of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the upper edge side of the upper center decoration board 314 The capacitor is disposed parallel to 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2. One end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor not shown is perpendicular to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center decoration substrate 314. It is arranged as. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged with the end of the land pattern inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 and the resistance They are disposed on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decorative substrate 314 so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one longitudinal end of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

  Further, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314, and ten full color LEDs HLED1 to hLED10 as viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 toward the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 and in a semicircular arc shape of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are closer to the upper edge 314eg1 of the upper center decoration substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper upper decoration substrate 314 while being arranged with a predetermined distance along the side. A configuration is adopted in which the LED is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center decoration board 314 of the dish. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink type as described above, similarly to the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, by absorbing constant current flowing in each LED element. Heat up. For this reason, also in the upper central decoration substrate 314 formed in a strip-like shape having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx and the ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are separated from each other. The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less susceptible to the 10 full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  In addition, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center decoration plate 314, the constant current drive circuit The end of the land pattern of 314ax and 314bx is disposed parallel to the left end and the right end of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457), the one where the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged nonparallel to the left end side and the right end side of the decoration substrate is the decoration substrate The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the rendering operation unit 300, so that the large-scale rendering operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3, and the rendering operation unit A light emission effect can be performed by 300.

[10-4-3. Genus pad on the bottom of IC package of constant current drive circuit]
The types of IC packages of constant current drive circuits that are the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the upper center plate decoration substrate 314 are flat as described above. It is a surface mounting type having a square shape and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  The metal pad FP is exposed at the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called exposed pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. The IC package can be soldered to a substrate to enhance heat dissipation and bonding.

  The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with a square-shaped land pattern EP for EPad in addition to each lead pad. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b. Nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation grid form in the area of the land pattern EP for ePad. By these thermal vias TV, the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left-side decoration substrate 402b are electrically connected. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad can not be drawn out in the region of the land pattern EP for EPad.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink type, and generates heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is generated from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b through the land pattern EP for EPad. By diffusing, it is possible to dissipate heat all over the lower left side decoration substrate 402b.

  A brief description will be given of the relationship between the land pattern EP for EPad and the nine thermal vias TV. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the land pattern EP for EPad is constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so as to be 50% or more with respect to the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the junction area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered does not become too large and generation of voids is prevented, and this junction area becomes too small and stable. It is possible to obtain a good bonding strength. Although the land pattern EP for EPad can be divided into a grid and formed, also in this case, as described above, the constant current drive circuit as described above in order to prevent the occurrence of the void and obtain the stable bonding strength. It is necessary to make the junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the land pattern EP for EPad 50% or more with respect to the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various substrates which can be supplied from a power supply from a power supply substrate and can control electric decoration (for example, JP-A-2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, inside the gaming machine, lines for transmitting power to various boards and lines for transmitting control signals are drawn, and the length of the lines becomes longer, which may cause various boards to be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

[11. Game content]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B thrown into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B in one minute continuously. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nail N Thus, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the gaming ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at a suitable position in the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it abuts on a plurality of obstacle nails N, The region to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

  The game balls B supplied to the stage 2503 roll on the stage 2503 and move back and forth, and are discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the gaming ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the gaming area 5a, the portion is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, so it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  The game balls B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is brought closer to the center in the left and right direction by the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N. Or, it may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B inserted into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the outermost portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right-handed) , And emitted to the top of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center character 2500. In addition to the gate unit 2003 of the gate unit 2300, a second starting opening 2004 and a general winning opening 2001 of the center combination 2500 are provided in this part, and the gate unit 2003 is passed with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball B, which has been hit to the right, passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the second lottery opening is closed when the lottery result is “normal hit”. The state of 2004 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are placed on the upper tray 201. Be paid out.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0) .01 to 60 seconds, commonly referred to as fluctuating time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result can not be started, The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is held until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”) advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 A lottery of special lottery results is generated to generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (certain variation)", and "time reduction (short time)", and the special lottery result drawn is Suggests to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 In the special lottery results, there are "lost", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15 R big hit", "per probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction) per", " "Successive time short hit", "Successive time short nona" Per ", and the like.

  The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 generate the advantageous gaming state In this case, after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 can receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When game ball B is accepted in first large winning opening 2005 or second large winning opening 2006 when first large winning opening 2005 or second large winning opening 2006 is open, main control substrate 1310 and payout control substrate 633. A predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 according to. Therefore, when the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 allows the game ball B to be received, the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 receives the game ball B in many cases. The game ball B can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  If the special lottery result is "small hit", the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006, the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) Is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice) to close the opening and closing pattern after becoming an open state that can be received. On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept the game ball B. If any of the conditions of passage or acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B to the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is satisfied, the game ball B can not be received. The open / close pattern to be closed (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, "5R big hit" for 5 rounds, and "15R big hit" for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 indicate the reception of the game ball B from the start of the special drawing until the special lottery result drawn is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Be put on hold. The number of pending special lottery results pending is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the command from the main control substrate 1310, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row in which each pattern row is fluctuated and variably displayed in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Is sequentially displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows displayed in the stop pattern become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is made. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the finalized image is The time until it is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by effect display device 1600, peripheral control board 1510 performs the rendering operation in effect operation unit 300 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, or the rotation operation can be inhibited. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the decoration boards provided in the door frame 3, the decoration boards provided in the game board 5, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the back unit 3000, and the upper rear It is possible to perform luminous effects, movable effects, etc. by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200 and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 etc. It is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the player's game It is possible to suppress the decline in interest to

  Furthermore, in the player control type player operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 on the peripheral control substrate 1510, when the operation to be operated by the player is mistaken or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player of that. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates or the like. The effect display device 1600 displays that effect.

  Further, in peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by effect display device 1600, according to the special lottery result drawn, the front effect unit of front unit 2000 in game board 5 It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by suitably using 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper back movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 etc. The player can also be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like has a gaming area where a game is performed by a game medium being hit by a player's operation, and a plurality of embedded in a predetermined gauge array within the gaming area. A plurality of entrances (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large opening capable of accepting gaming media in the game area while being able to receive obstacle media and gaming media) A winning opening, a prize winning opening), a V winning opening, etc.). Then, when a game medium is received in the receiver, a benefit (disbursement of game medium, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, and the like) is provided, so that the game medium is sent to the player As accepted, it is possible to entertain the game media typing operation.

  A plurality of game machines of this type are vertically movably disposed between the vicinity of the upper edge and the vicinity of the center in the front view game area, and are rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward and projecting outward The thing provided with the rotation decoration body of is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-279548). In the technique of this document, in the normal state, the rotary ornament is positioned near the upper edge, and the rotary ornament is lowered near the center according to the gaming state which is changed by playing the game in the gaming area. By rotating, the plurality of rotating ornaments rotate outward in a state of being protruded outward, the whole becomes large, and the player can be surprised, and the player can be notified of the arrival of a chance.

  However, in a technique such as the above-mentioned document, in a normal state where rotation is stopped, a plurality of rotating ornaments visible from the player side are projected outward by rotation, so that the whole becomes larger. There is a possibility that some players may get bored early with the effects of the plural rotating ornaments, and the interest for the game may be lowered by the player not being able to enjoy the effects. The

[12. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment,
Thereby, in the normal state, the central decorative body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the retracted position raised near the upper edge in the front view gaming area 5a, and First position in which a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a and second protruding decorative portions 3353a of the protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other two by two on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 It is located in Here, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the right side. From this, the central decorative body 3351 can be seen near the upper edge in the front view gaming area 5a, and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a respectively on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 The interior of the game area 5a is decorated with the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In a normal state, since the two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a located at the first position overlap in the front and back, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projection on the front side are Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front (the player side), it can be made difficult to notice the presence of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the rear side. It can be recognized that the number of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is only the number currently visible. When the LEDs mounted on the upper front central decoration substrate, the first protruding decoration portion decoration substrate, and the second protruding decoration portion decoration substrate are made to emit light in the normal state, the central decoration 3351, the first protruding decoration portion 3352a and the Since the two projecting decorative portions 3353a can be made to emit light and decorate, the central decorative body 3351 and the first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decoration can be formed by the central decorative body 3351 or the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a. The portion 3353a can be highlighted, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351 or the like. In addition, since the central decoration 3351 and the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decorations 3353 are in the retracted position near the upper edge of the front view gaming area 5a in the normal state, the front view game The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed at the center of the area 5a is not blocked by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351 and the like, and in a good state from the player side The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can enjoy the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the gaming state which is changed by playing a game in the gaming area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the lower appearing position. Then, the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 descend together. At this time, the second protruding decorative portion 3353 a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 is on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the first protruding decorative portion 3352 a of the remaining first protruding decorative body 3352 is on the right side of the central decorative body 3351, The lower ends of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right are attached respectively, and the upper ends of the second link rods 3304 for the left and right are respectively attached rotatably to the unit base 3301 within a predetermined range. By being attached to the tip of the first link rod 3303 that is attached, it is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the central decoration 3351, so it descends together with the central decoration 3351 First projecting decorative body 3352 and second projecting decorative body 3353 (first projecting decorative portion 3352a and second projecting decoration) The second link rod 3304 of the left and right by part 3353A) is pulled to the same downwardly moving direction of the central decorative body 3351, respectively, the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 is able to slide downwardly relative to the unit base 3301. The upper end portions of the left and right second link rods 3304 can be slid vertically by the first link rod 3303 within a range shorter than the moving distance (raising and lowering distance) of the central decorative body 3351. The upper end of each of the left and right second link rods 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction before the 3351 reaches the appearance position of the falling end. Then, after the upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end portion in the sliding direction, when the central decorative body 3351 is further moved toward the lower emerging position, the lower end portion of the second link rod 3304 is further located Of the two first projecting ornaments 3352 and the second projecting ornaments 3353 which are going to be lowered together with the central ornament 3351 by the left and right second link rods 3304. The first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side are pulled toward the upper unit base 3301 side, and by this force, the two first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 become central decoration The center of the central decoration 3351 by the first connecting rod 3352 b and the second connecting rod 3353 b attached to the rear side of the body 3351 The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on both left and right sides are rotated in different directions with respect to the axis extending back and forth as the center, and the front and back overlapping is eliminated from the first position where the front and back are overlapped. Move to the second position. As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, which appeared to be one on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, are turned into two and the fan spreads, and the central decorative body 3351 and One large decoration can be formed by the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a radially extending around the central decoration 3351 and can be shown to the player. Therefore, since all the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a appear around the central decorative body 3351 moved to the center of the game area 5a, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second While increasing the number of projecting decorative portions 3353a, it is possible to punish the player's mind, and the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a around the central decorative body 3351 are spread, and the entire decoration is made. Can be made large, and a strong impact can be given to the player to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, when the central front body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position of the rising end to the appearance position of the falling end by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper end of the left and right second link rods 3304 is the lower end in the sliding direction. The two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 overlap each other until reaching (a pivoting end to the lower side on the tip side of the first link rod 3303). The descent together with the central decoration 3351 in the first position, and after the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, the central decoration 3351 appears in the direction of appearance (downward ) From the first position where the two left and right first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a overlap with each other while moving to the second position where the overlapping is eliminated. The central decorative body 3351 will be expanded radially, and the player can be made to show a movable effect in which the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 perform two steps of movement. Therefore, by appropriately controlling the upper front drive motor 3302, it is possible to stop the movement (rendering) at the first stage or move it to the second stage (rendering), and It is possible to increase variations of movable effects using the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative bodies 3353, make it possible to entertain the player with various effects, and make it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, since the central decoration 3351 can be moved from the retracted position of the rising end to the appearance position of the falling end by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the gaming state, in the normal state of the central decoration 3351 in the retracted position, When the gaming state changes, the player can be snarled and pounded by whether or not the central decorative body 3351 descends to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. Then, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the emerging position side by the upper front drive motor 3302, and the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are moved to the first stage where rotational movement does not occur. Since the decoration body 3351 and the two first protruding decoration bodies 3352 and the second protruding decoration body 3353 move downward in the normal state, it seems that something may be good for the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation for the game. Furthermore, when the central decoration 3351 is lowered to the second stage, that is, when the central decoration 3351 is lowered to the appearance position of the falling edge, four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and second protruding decorative portions 3353a radially expand around the central decoration 3351. The central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can show a large decoration to the player, and the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a and the like can be made to feel like the notice from the sky is given to the player by the descent, advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage over the player Can make it possible to make the player feel more hoped for the game, and can make it difficult for the player to get bored, Against it is possible to suppress the lowering of interest.

  Thus, when lowering the central decorative body 3351 from the retracted position to the emerging position, the movements of the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be changed in two steps Therefore, the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous differs between when the player stops in the first step and when the player stops in the second step. It can be recognized that the second stage has higher expectation than the first stage, and the central decoration 3351 and the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decoration can be suggested. With the body 3353 various expected values can be displayed to the player.

  In addition, the central decoration 3351 is made to descend to the appearance position near the center in the front view gaming area 5a, and by lowering the central decoration 3351 to the appearance position, a space is secured around the central decoration 3351. In order to facilitate this, the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a can be moved from the first position to the second position and radially spread around the central decorative body 3351 at the appearance position, and the central decorative structure The body 3351 and the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decorations 3353 can form as large a decoration as possible. Therefore, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the gaming state, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protrusions radially spread around it in the vicinity of the center of the game area 5a. Since the player can be made to show a large decoration by the decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, the player can be surprised, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. While being able to be enjoyed, it is possible to entertain large decorations by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  Furthermore, when the central decorative body 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the emerging position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are in the first position To move to the second position, and to move the central decoration 3351 and the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decorations 3353 by one upper front drive motor 3302, When performing rendering (movable rendering) using the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353, it is sufficient to control only one upper front drive motor 3302. Such load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing rendering using the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353, performing rendering using other movable decorative bodies, light emitting decorative bodies, etc. simultaneously Also, since it is possible to suppress an increase in load applied to the control of the effect, the control of the effect becomes unstable due to the overload, and the upper front drive motor 3302 causes the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 And it is possible to prevent the movement of the second projecting decorative body 3353 from making a jerky, and make sure to exhibit the rendering effect using the central decorative body 3351 or the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can provide the above-described effects.

  Also, as described above, while the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the second position. Since the movement is performed, the speed at which the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move (rotate) to the second position is relatively faster than the moving speed of the central decoration 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding parts 3352a and the second protruding parts 3353a can be suddenly spread around the central decoration 3351, and the player is surprised that the central decoration 3351 and two second The presentation using the one projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, as described above, after the central decorative body 3351 is moved from the retracted position toward the appearance position to some extent, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right of the central It is made to move from the position to the second position. That is, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are moved to the center side to some extent from near the upper edge of the front view gaming area 5a, and then spread radially around the central decorative body 3351 Since the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a are moved to the second position, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decoration can be moved from the position to the second position. The portion 3353a can be made difficult to abut on another member, and breakage of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, and the other members can be prevented.

  In addition, when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front central decoration substrate, the first protruding decoration portion decoration substrate, and the second protruding decoration portion decoration substrate are made to emit light, the central decoration 3351 and the four first protruding decoration portions 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be individually light emitting decorated, the central decorative body 3351 or the first protruding can be formed by the light emitting decoration of the central decorative body 3351 or the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a. The decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351 or the like. Therefore, before lowering the central decorative body 3351 and the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 from the retracted position to the emerging position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper front central decorative substrate, the first projecting decoration The player is decorated by emitting a light by the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on both left and right sides by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the partial decorative substrate and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate. Since the upper front drive motor 3302 can move the central decorative body 3351 or the like to the appearance position, the player can be harassing and pounding, and the player can be entertained. Can not.

  Then, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position on the central side of the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302 and the four first decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portions 3353a are radially arranged around the central decorative body Can be made to surprise the player and make him think that there is something good, and can increase the player's expectation for the game. When the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the upper front central decorative substrate, the first projecting decorative portion decorative substrate, and the second projecting decorative portion decorative substrate are formed into a central decorative body 3351 and four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and By making the light emitting decoration of the two projecting decoration portion 3353a possible, it is possible to show the player the decoration that greatly shines in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player has an advantage in the advantageous gaming state (for example, Can be considered to occur, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, when the central front body 3351 is lowered by the upper front drive motor 3302 to the appearing position at the center of the gaming area 5a, Because (the part of) the effect image is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352, and the second projecting decorative body 3353, it is possible for the player to notice the descent of the central decorative body 3351 or the like to draw attention. It is possible to move from the first position to the second position to show the four first and second projecting decorative portions 3352a and 3353a radially extending around the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, in the center of the game area 5a, it is possible to reliably show the player a large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, and the above-described effects Can be a pachinko machine 1 that reliably plays

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center character 2500 is disposed at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, and the gaming ball B is in the area excluding the frame of the center character 2500. Can play the game in which A front effect unit 2600 provided with a transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center character 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame, and the effect is disposed rearward through the front light guide plate 2610 The effect image displayed on the display device 1600 can be enjoyed. In this state, according to the gaming state changed by playing a game in the gaming area 5a, a predetermined LED 2630 of the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the upper edge of the front light guide plate 2610 via the reflector 2620 When any of (the first LED group 2630 a, the second LED group 2630 b, the third LED group 2630 c, and the fourth LED group 2630 d) is made to emit light, the LED 2630 is identified on the circumferential surface of the front light guide plate 2610. Light is applied to the light receiving unit 2612 (any one of the first specific light receiving unit 2612 a, the second specific light receiving unit 2612 b, the third specific light receiving unit 2612 c, and the fourth specific light receiving unit 2612 d), and the specific light entering A pattern 2614 (a first pattern 2614a, a second pattern 2614b, a third picture) corresponding to the light incident from the light unit 2612 into the front light guide plate 2610 2614C, so that the fourth picture 2614D, one) is the luminous display. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, and a plurality of through holes 2622 penetrating the fixing recess 2621 move to the specific light receiving unit 2612 side. Since the plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 through the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 to be faced, it is possible to make the LED 2630 as close as possible to the peripheral surface (specific light entrance portion 2612) of the light guide plate main body 2611 While the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612, and the light from the LED 2630 can be prevented from being diffused by the through hole 2622, and the specific light reception not corresponding Irradiation of light to the portion 2612 can be prevented.

  And the light which entered into the light guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light incident part 2612 corresponds to the corresponding reflection recess 2613 (first reflection recess 2613a, second reflection recess 2613b, third reflection recess 2613c, fourth reflection recess 2613d The light irradiated in the reflective recess 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflective recess 2613 extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light receiving portion 2612, the light that is emitted to the reflective recess 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction, Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 is included, the eyes of the player sitting on the front of the game area 5a (light guide plate main body 2611) have the light guide plate main body 2611 by the reflective recess 2613. The light reflected or refracted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light reaches and the reflecting recess 2613 appears to glow, and the pattern 2614 configured by the reflecting recess 2613 appears to be displayed in a luminous manner. On the other hand, light entering the light guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light entrance portion 2612 will also reach the reflective concave portion 2613 which does not correspond to the specific light entrance portion 2612, but the reflective concave portion 2613 which does not correspond is The direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflective recess 2613 is perpendicular to the plane of the light guide plate main body 2611 because it extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the specific light entrance portion 2612 where the light is incident. It does not reach the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and does not appear to be shining. As described above, when the specific light receiving portion 2612 is irradiated with light by the LED 2630, only the reflective recess 2613 corresponding to the specific light receiving portion 2612 reflects or refracts light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It can be made to reach the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and can be shown to the player as if only the pattern 2614 composed of the corresponding reflective recess 2613 is being lighted. .

  Therefore, by changing the specific light receiving portion 2612 to which light is emitted by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 to be emitted, it is possible to change variously the pattern 2614 to be displayed by light in the front light guide plate 2610. The light emission display of 2614 makes it possible to surprise and entertain the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest for the game. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed to be sequentially associated with one another, the plurality of LEDs 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group according to the game state When the light emitting diode 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d are sequentially emitted, a plurality of patterns (first image 2614a, second image 2614b, third image 2614c, fourth image 2614d) are sequentially emitted and displayed on the surface light guide plate 2610, and the animation It is possible to show the player a luminous display with movement like.

  Specifically, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are displayed in order of light, and after the last fourth pattern 2614d, the first pattern is returned again and the first pattern 2614a is repeated again. In the case where the light emission display is repeated in order, it is possible to show the player a light emission display which continues to move from the outside to the center by the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give the person an illusion that the momentum is concentrated, and to make the expectation of the game to be heightened by making it think that there is something good. On the other hand, contrary to this, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second pattern 2614b, and the first pattern 2614a are displayed in the order of light emission, and the next after the last first pattern 2614a is returned first and the second again In the case where the light emission display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the player can be made to show the light emission display which keeps moving from the center to the outside by the plural patterns of the light guide plate. It is possible for the player to make an illusion to expand from the center or an illusion to move forward, and to allow the player to foresee change in the gaming state. As described above, since it is possible to show the player the luminous display having motion like animation, it is possible for the player to be strong by the movable luminous display by the front light guide plate 2610 which has never been seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1 It is possible to give an impact, to attract the player's interest strongly, and to make it possible for the player to think that the advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is generated, to the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is mounted within the frame of the center character 2500 to which the center character 2500 is attached at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, light is emitted even if the pattern 2614 is caused to emit light by the LED 2630 The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, making it difficult to see the game. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted and to enjoy the game in a good state.

  In addition, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the conventional case where the light guide plate 2610 is attached The backlash between them can be eliminated, and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at the desired position with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned relative to the specific light entrance portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 Luminescent display can be reliably performed.

  Furthermore, since the pattern 2614 is configured by a plurality of reflection recesses 2613 extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting with the specific light entrance portion 2612, the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 are made of the light guide plate main body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be guided by arranging the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, which can be disposed on a specific side (here, upper side) in the peripheral edge. It can be disposed only on the upper side of the light plate main body 2611. Thereby, compared with the case where the front cover (frame) is provided over the entire periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 without the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 being surrounded by the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630). Therefore, since it is possible to avoid dividing the effect image or decoration of the effect display device 1600 arranged behind, it is possible to make the effect image etc easy to see from the player side, While being able to enjoy the effect image in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, the pachinko machine 1 with a sense of opening can be obtained by the absence of a frame-shaped partition in the gaming area 5a in front view, The appearance of the game area 5a can be improved to make the pachinko machine 1 with appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention.

  In addition, as described above, since a plurality of (four in this case) patterns 2614 can be displayed by light emission with one front light guide plate 2610, it is not necessary to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the prior art. The dimension in the front-rear direction concerning the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be made as small (thin) as possible, and the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center character 2500, so The position can be as close as possible, and a wide space can be easily secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since a large space can be secured behind the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. are provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged to improve the appearance of the game area 5a to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and in addition to the effect by the light emission display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect By performing movable effects by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., various effects can be provided to the player, and the player is entertained to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

  In addition, since the front surface light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center character 2500, the peripheral edge of the front surface light guide plate 2610 and the frame of the center character 2500 are aligned with each other. And the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be made difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to surprise the player who thought that 2610 does not exist by giving a strong impact to the player and enjoying the light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 to suppress the decrease in interest it can.

  Furthermore, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflectors 2620 from the player side, the appearance of the game area 5a can be prevented from being deteriorated by the reflectors 2620 etc. being seen. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By making the pattern 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display not predicted by the player, and the light emission display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed and the player is entertained. It can be made to think that there is something good for it, and it is possible to make the expectation for the game higher and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image behind the front light guide plate 2610 is provided, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 Therefore, it is possible to show various effects to the player by combining them appropriately, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 are displayed. Thus, the player can be entertained by the effect produced by the player, and the decrease in interest for the player's game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 Is different, and by displaying effect images associated with the plurality of patterns 2614 light-emitting and displayed by the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the pattern 2614 being light-emitting and displayed. The effect (display effect) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 moving up and down on the game board 5 having the game area 5a are decorated. A top rear left decoration substrate and a top rear right decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for emitting and decorating the top rear right decoration 3240 and the top rear left decoration 3220 and the top rear right decoration 3240 are mounted are attached Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is heavy, and the force to move the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward by gravity acts in a large state. In this state, when transporting the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) or installing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) on the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrates in the pachinko machine 1 When the force for moving the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 is further applied, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 The clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240). The roller 3254 is accommodated by the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the The roller 3254 is pressed between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b by being pressed against the inner surface of the sleeve 3251, and the force for rotating the storage case 3251 by the plurality of rollers 3254 acts. It will be done. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, a frictional resistance is generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case is formed via the plurality of rollers 3254. Since the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 is resisted by the force to rotate 3251, the housing case 3251 does not rotate, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, the output according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper back left decoration 3220 side and upper back right decoration 3240 side) from the upper back left drive motor 3214 side to the upper back right drive motor 3234 side Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can be restrained from falling freely. Therefore, since the movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be locked by the clutch mechanism 3250, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be locked during transportation or installation. The player can prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the moving end to damage the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232 and the other members. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by surely enjoying the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is shipped in the manufacturing plant, even if the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 are shipped at the origin position, the upper back left by the clutch mechanism 3250 Since the decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving freely, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 when installed on the island facility of the game hall It is not necessary to carry out the process of installing the pachinko machine 1 and the burden on the installation can be reduced.

  In addition, when installing or maintaining the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from the regular position (origin position) for some reason In this case, when the operator tries to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to regular positions by hand, the clutch mechanism 3250 tightens the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251 as a torque limiter Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are prevented from moving by locking the rotation on the output side according to the load of rotation by tightening with 3255, the operator can use the upper rear left decorative body In order to move 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, a stronger force is applied to the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 When the force to rotate the storage case 3251 through the plurality of rollers 3254 is larger than the frictional resistance generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, the storage case against the frictional resistance. The sliding occurs between 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case 3251 is rotated, and the output member 3253 is rotated together with the storage case 3251 so that the lock is released, and the rotation of the output member 3253 Is transmitted to the upper back left drive motor 3214 and the upper back right drive motor 3234 through the input member 3252. Therefore, a strong force acting on the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 is It can be released to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper It is possible to rear right decorative body 3240 and the clutch mechanism 3250 and the like can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, according to the game state which changes due to the fact that game is done inside game territory 5a, top back left drive motor 3214 and top back right unit 3230 of top back left unit 3210 in top back movable presentation unit 3200 of back unit 3000. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the rotation is transmitted through the clutch mechanism 3250 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 are in front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are lowered respectively, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and Surprise the player by the descent (appearance) of the upper rear right decoration 3240 It is possible to make the player pay attention to the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 to enjoy the movement and decoration of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240, and Lowering the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 makes it possible for the player to think that something may be good for the player, and the expectation for the game is heightened and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decoration 3220 and upper rear right decoration 3240). Therefore, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, and the vibration from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies etc. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate as the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 try to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the output member 3253 The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the A state where the roller 3254 has been bitten between the inner surface and the cam surface 3253b of over scan 3251, the force to rotate the accommodating case 3251 by a plurality of rollers 3254 is to act. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, a frictional resistance is generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case is formed via the plurality of rollers 3254. Since the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 is resisted by the force to rotate 3251, the housing case 3251 does not rotate, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, the output according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper back left decoration 3220 side and upper back right decoration 3240 side) from the upper back left drive motor 3214 side to the upper back right drive motor 3234 side Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can be restrained from lowering by themselves, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the left slider 3212 via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can be restricted. It is possible to prevent the upper back right decoration 3240 from moving unexpectedly (falling), and the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 move unintendedly so that the player feels distrust to the player. To make the player enjoy the movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are about to be lowered, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be stopped at any height position via the right slider 3232, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 are various. It is possible to show the player a variety of effect patterns that are stopped moving up and down at the position, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with the movable effects of the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. It can be done.

  In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the upper rear left The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and the early breakage of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload can be prevented and the upper portion It is possible to prevent interruption of the game due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 129 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the projecting portion 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively locked by the lock spring 3260. The roller 3254 is immediately urged to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side in a case where it is urged toward the protruding portion 3252a close to each of them. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and after the rotation from the upper rear left decoration 3220 side and the upper rear right decoration 3240 side acts, the lock The rotation of the output member 3253 can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel discomfort in the movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240, and enjoys the movable effect by the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple configuration using the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, the plurality of rollers 3254, etc., two planetary gear mechanisms are provided as the clutch mechanism. Since it is easy to miniaturize the whole as compared with the case of the above, by miniaturizing the clutch mechanism 3250, a space for disposing the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or other members) It becomes possible to make it easy to secure, and it is possible to make the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 relatively large in size and make them stand out, and the large upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 The pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly and have high appeal to the player.

  Furthermore, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 provided with the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are provided, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left unit 3220 can be selected according to the gaming state By appropriately raising and lowering the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the respective left sliders 3212 and right sliders 3232, it is possible to play various patterns of movable effects by two upper rear left decorative bodies 3220 and upper rear right decorative bodies 3240. It is possible to show the player, and make it difficult for the player to get bored, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest for the game. At this time, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are respectively provided with the clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 are as described above. Can smoothly move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, when the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the gaming state, the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper By bringing the back right decoration 3240 into contact with each other, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be united to form a large decoration, so a large decoration appears. Can give a strong impact to the player and can entertain the player, and the advantageous gaming state (e.g. It can be thought that a "big hit game" may occur, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest. When the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 abut each other and unite, it is attempted to move the upper back right decoration 3240 or the upper back left decoration 3220 on the opposite side by bringing the other into contact with each other. However, since each clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, as described above, the force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (from the output side) Even if the force to rotate is applied, the roller 3254 is engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration 3240 Movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be prevented from moving by It is also possible to prevent the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 from moving back by movement, and ensure that the movable effect in which the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 abut and unite is played Can be entertained to reduce the decline in interest.

  In addition, the upper back left decoration body 3220 and the upper back right decoration body 3240 can be made to emit light by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper back left decoration board and the upper back right decoration board according to the game state. Therefore, the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be highlighted to attract the player's interest strongly, and the decoration and movement of the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 The top rear left decoration 3220 and the top rear right decoration 3240 can be made to emit light and it can make the player think that something is good for the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by raising the sense of expectation for In addition, by providing the upper rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the weight related to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 is increased, and the gravity and inertia force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 are increased. Also, as described above, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. The upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back right decoration 3240 can be prevented from moving unintentionally by the upper back left decoration substrate and the upper back right decoration substrate, and the upper back left decoration 3220 and the upper back left decoration 3240 can be prevented. It is possible to make the desired effect with high rendering effect on the upper rear right decoration body 3240, and to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest. Rukoto can.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the accommodation case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodation case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodation recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. The roller 3254 is pressed by the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 to the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by rotating the 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force for rotating the storage case 3251 is applied through the plurality of rollers 3254, a force (torque) for rotating the storage case 3251 is a frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Between the containing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, when the housing case 3251 is rotated, the output member 3253 is rotated through the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts on the projecting portion 3252 a of the input member 3252. The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated by a strong force from the output side, a slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is reduced to the upper rear left Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper back right drive motor 3234 side and released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and can not be unlocked, or the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear right decoration It is possible to prevent the body 3240, the output member 3253, and the storage case 3251 from being damaged, and to embody the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exerts the above-described effects.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower right side of the lower central elevator base 3121 and the lower central elevator base 3121 in the front view gaming area 5a. The elevating base 3171 is lowered respectively, and the sliders etc. (slide mechanism) attached to the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 respectively produce the left side rotary decoration 3153 and the right side rotary decoration 3173 is slid outward in the left-right direction, and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a is retracted downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 is visible at the center of the front view gaming area 5a, and the lower front center decoration 3111 (lower rear center decoration at the lower center within the game area 5a The body 3122) and the four rotating ornaments 3126 aligned in the left and right direction of the central movable unit 3125 attached to the top of the body 3122) are visible, and both left and right away from the left and right ends of the row of four rotary ornaments 3126 The left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173 of the lower left side rendering unit 3150 and the lower right side rendering unit 3170 can be seen at positions respectively, and the left sub side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 can be seen above , Furthermore, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a As part 301 rotates the operation portion 302 of the annular and the pushing operation section 303 placed in the ring being visible.

  In this state, when the gaming state is changed by playing a game in the gaming area 5a (the first special lottery result or the first selected by the reception of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004) Two special lottery results), the four rotating ornaments 3126 that are aligned on the upper side of the lower front central ornament 3111 are rotated, or the four rotating ornaments are aligned horizontally by the lower central lift base 3121 The lower left slide drive motor and the lower right side of the lower left side rendering unit 3150 or the rotation of the four rotating decorations 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121. The lower right slide drive motor or the like (slide mechanism) of the rendering unit 3170 causes the pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and the right The left side rotation decoration 3173 slides in the left and right direction, the left side rotation decoration 3153 and the right side rotation decoration 3173 rotate, and the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 Side rotating decoration 3153 and right side rotating decoration 3173 are arranged side by side with four rotating decoration 3126 and left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rising, left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 Because the player can show the player the movable effect that the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rotates or plays, the player can be displayed as the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorations 3126) and the left side rotating decoration 3153 Right side rotating ornament 3173 and left sub side rotating ornament 3155 It is possible to focus on the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  In addition, when the lower central lift base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower back central decoration 3122 is made to emit light to cause the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light, thereby displaying a downward arrow light emission, or the lower central lift The base 3121 is raised, and a plurality of LEDs on the lower central decoration substrate cause the lower back central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 to emit light, thereby causing a large downward arrow to be emitted, or a pair of lower left side elevators Since the larger downward arrow can be displayed by emitting light by raising the base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, the light emission can be displayed. The player can be entertained even by the effect, and the downward displayed light is displayed. Arrow makes it possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301, it is possible to prompt the operation of the staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the player participates in the effect by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302, rotating the rotation operation unit 302, pressing the pressing operation unit 303, or the like. Can be entertained.

  Therefore, since various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation effects can be performed as described above, various patterns of effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to predict the effect pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by the unexpected effect being performed, and the player Can be controlled to suppress the decline in interest for the game.

  In addition, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and the right side rotary ornaments 3173, and the pair of left subside rotary ornaments 3155 and the right subside rotary ornament 3175 are extended in the left-right direction. The player side is made to rotate since they are rotated independently of each other and have four decorative portions 3127, 3154 and 3156 which are different from each other in the circumferential direction. It is possible to change the facing surface (the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156), and to change the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a variously to entertain the player.

  Also, when the four rotating ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornaments 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotating ornaments 3155 and the right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 are stopped rotating, By stopping their rotation so that the combination of the decorative part 3127, the decorative part 3154, and the decorative part 3156 facing the player becomes a predetermined combination, various messages are displayed as decoration to the player. Since it is possible to provide, the possibility of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player has an advantage by the combination of the decorative portions 3127, the decorative portions 3154 and the decorative portions 3156 which are stopped rotating. By representing (expected value), each of the four rotating ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 according to the gaming state When the right side rotation decoration 3173 and the pair of left sub-side rotation decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 are rotated, the combination of the decoration 3127, the decoration 3154, and the decoration 3156 with higher expectation value is rotated. Depending on whether or not the game is stopped, the player can be excited and excited, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the lower rear central decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3122 a arranged in the vertical direction and capable of emitting light independently of each other, one light emitting area 3122 a can be simultaneously emitted. A downward arrow can be displayed in a luminous manner, and by repeatedly emitting light from the plurality of light emitting areas 3122a in order from the top, the player's line of sight is directed to the effect operation unit 301 below by the light emission flowing from the top to the bottom. It can be made easy to guide, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be further urged to allow the player to reliably operate the effect operation unit 301.

  Furthermore, since the ring-shaped rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring are provided as the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed on the player. Since the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be performed, the pattern of the player participation type effect can be diversified by appropriately combining the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and the player To make it difficult to get tired and to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is surrounded by the rotation operation unit 302, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased. The large rotation operation unit 302 can strongly attract the player's attention. Therefore, as described above, when the line of sight of the player is guided downward by the light emission display of the downward arrow by the lower back central ornament 3122 or the lower front central ornament 3111, the rotation operation unit 302 (press operation unit 303 Therefore, the player can strongly urge the player to operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303, and can enjoy the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, since the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302, as described above, the light emission display of the downward arrow by the lower rear central decoration 3122 and the lower front central decoration 3111 When the player looks at the lower side of the arrow, the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen, so the possibility of the advantageous gaming state occurring to the player by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 While being able to strongly press the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to surely press the pressing operation unit 303, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of people with disabilities.

  In addition, since the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to be in a lowered state and in a projecting state, the pressing operation unit 303 appears to be largely noticeable when the pressing operation unit 303 is projected. It is possible to make the player think that the possibility of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous is high. On the other hand, since the pressing operation unit 303 is less noticeable when the pressing operation unit 303 is lowered, the player can be reminded that the possibility of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is low, and the pressing operation unit 303 The player's advance / retraction position allows the player to indicate the possibility (expected value) of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state.

  In addition, since it is possible to suggest the possibility (expected value) that the advantageous gaming state will occur to the player by the advance / retraction position of the pressing operation unit 303, as described above, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 or the lower front When the downward arrow is lighted and displayed by the central decorative body 3111 or the like, the player can be snarled and pounded by whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, and the expectation of the player is enhanced and the pressing operation is performed. The pressing operation of the portion 303 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image in the center of the front view game area 5a is provided, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 Also, the player can be entertained, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed at the rear of the lower movable effect unit 3100 and at the center of the front view gaming area 5a in the front view game area 5a, the lower central elevator base 3121 is combined with the lower rear central decorative body 3122 according to the game state. The left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament together with the lower left side ornament 3152 and the lower right side ornament 3172 by raising the four rotating ornaments 3126 or by the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower right side elevation base 3171 When the body 3173 is lifted, a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, etc. Four rotating ornaments 3126 and left side rotating ornaments for the player Since it is possible to notice the rise of the 3153 and the right side turn decoration 3173 etc., it is possible to surely show the player the effect using them, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest .

  In addition, since the effect image can be displayed at the center in the front view gaming area 5a, as described above, the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower back center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, the lower right side The effect image for prompting the player to operate the effect operating unit 301, the effect operating unit, or the like when the player is prompted to operate the effect operating unit 301 below by making the downward arrow light-emitted by the decorative body 3172 or the like The effect operation unit 301 is displayed to the player by displaying an effect image that explains the operation of the 301, an effect image that indicates the relationship between the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous and the effect operation unit 301, and the like. It is possible to strongly encourage participation in player participation type effects for operating the game, and to make it easy to operate the effect operation unit 301, and enjoy player participation type effects. The reduction of interest can be suppressed Te.

  Further, as described above, since various effects of the combination can be shown to the player, for example, the lower central lift base 3121 and the lower left side lift base 3151 and the lower right side lift base 3171 are usually lowered. From the state, when the left and right left side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornaments 3173 are moved to the center in the left and right direction by slide mechanisms such as the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right slide drive motor, The left side rotation ornament 3153 and the right side rotation ornament 3173 are positioned on the left and right sides of the row of three rotation ornaments 3126, and the four rotation ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotation ornaments 3153 and the right side rotation ornament Since the body 3173 and the side-by-side are in line, it is possible to surprise the player and enjoy the player. It can be.

  In this state, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and the right side rotary ornament 3173 are raised by the lower central elevation base 3121 and the lower left side elevation base 3151 and the lower right side elevation base 3171. , Four rotating ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and a right side rotating ornament 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotating ornaments 3155 and right sub-side rotating ornament 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction It is possible to show the player a large decoration that crosses the inside of the game area 5a, which gives the player a strong impact, and it seems that there may be something good. It is possible to increase the feeling of expectation for the game.

  Then, the four rotary ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotary ornaments 3153 and the right side rotary ornaments 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotary ornaments 3155 and the right sub-side rotary ornament 3175 can be used in appropriate combinations. In the state where they are lined up, when rotating them after rotating them, the combination of each decoration 3127, decoration 3154, decoration 3156, depending on whether or not the rotation is stopped in the desired combination is harahara · pounding pounding It is possible for the player to enjoy the rotation (the movable effect) of the four rotating ornaments 3126 and the like, and also to stop the rotation of each of the decorative portions 3127 and the like in a desired combination, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. It is possible to convince the occurrence of “A”, to increase the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  After that, the lower back central decoration 3122 (lower front central decoration 3111), the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 cause the downward arrow to light up and display operations of the player's line of sight downward. It can be guided to the part 301, and the player can be prompted to operate the effect operation part 301.

  At this time, since it is possible to indicate the possibility (expected value) that the advantageous gaming state may occur depending on the size of the downward pointing arrow that is illuminated, if the illuminated arrow is small, the process continues for the player. It can be thought that it can be rolled by the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and since generation of the advantageous gaming state can be convinced if the arrow by which the light emission is displayed is small, the expectation for the game can be enhanced in any case. It is possible to enjoy the subsequent operation of the effect operation unit 301 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board capable of controlling the progression of the game can be controlled based on the command from the main control board 1310 provided in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 provided in the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 12 is provided as an effect control board capable of controlling the progression. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 of FIG. 132 as a ROM substrate and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 of FIG. 132 as a video signal output substrate. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has the peripheral data ROM 1520a shown in FIG. 132 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) relating to effects based on game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can output, to the effect display device 1600, a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 114 as a display device.

  Between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, as the first connector, the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 of FIG. 132 and the special connector provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 of FIG. It is electrically connected by the socket of SCN 3 and the board-to-board connector which can be connected between boards by the board. Between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as a second connector different from the first connector, the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 of FIG. 132 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 of FIG. It is electrically connected by the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the and the board-to-board connector which can be connected between boards by the board.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 can control the progression of effects by control information (peripheral data) read from the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and can output video signals to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by a plurality of types of methods. . Examples of a plurality of types of video signal methods include an RGB method, an LVDS method, an MIPI method, an eDP method, and a clockless method. In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of video signal methods, four systems (1 system of RGB system, 2 systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system (4 systems in total) ) Has been adopted.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are configured to be accommodated in the peripheral control substrate box 1505 of FIG. 132 as the same substrate box.

  In this manner, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which control information (peripheral data) regarding effects based on the game specification is stored in advance is provided on a dedicated substrate called peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 which is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510 A substrate for outputting a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to 1600 is provided on a dedicated substrate called a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510. That is, if the peripheral control board 1510 is not altered and newly manufactured according to control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specification, it conforms to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 Since it is not altered and manufactured anew, it can be configured as a common substrate that is not dependent on the game specification or the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is not necessary to manufacture a plurality of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specification and the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and the cost can be reduced by manufacturing only the same peripheral control boards 1510. Can contribute to Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 77 is provided, in which one payout passage 580a to which the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 of FIG. ing. The dispensing device 580 includes at least a dispensing motor 584 in FIG. 89 and a dispensing blade 589 in FIG. 89 as a ball feed rotating unit. The payout motor 584 can rotate the rotation shaft by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle in response to the step driving. The discharge blade 589 rotates via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the discharge gear 588a of the discharge gear member 588, wherein the rotation of the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 constitutes a rotation transmission member. Thus, a plurality of ball accommodating portions 589b are formed at equal intervals (three are formed at equal intervals every 120 degrees) as a ball receiving recess capable of receiving and sending out the game balls B one by one. .

  The reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance so that the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of the one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Specifically, as the reduction ratio n, the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588 are set by calculation by mechanics. The rotation angle of the delivery blade 589 can be detected by the plurality of detection pieces 588b of the delivery gear member 588 shown in FIG. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588.

  As described above, since the speed reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member that does not become an integer is determined in advance, the number of steps of driving the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is predetermined. The positioning position is different every time the balls are taken out. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, whereby the adhesion position of dust and dirt can be dispersed. Of course, if the above-mentioned reduction ratio n of the rotation transmission member that causes such a positioning error is set, although the error is accumulated, even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotational angle is detected by the plurality of detection pieces 588b of the delivery gear member 588 of FIG. 89 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the delivery blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feeding rotary unit which receives and sends the game ball is changed each time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where dust and / or dust adheres are dispersed to the dust or the like. It is possible to have a strong dispensing device 580.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the progress of the effect is based on the result of the ordinary lottery, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 The peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 132 is provided as effect control means capable of controlling the image. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a metallic shield plate 1540 of FIG. 132 as the first shield, a metallic back cover in the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 136 as the second shield, and a conductive covering portion 136 conductive elastic members 1545 are provided. The metal shield plate 1540 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The metal back cover in the effect display device 1600 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The conductive elastic member 1545 is a core material formed of an elastic member, and the surface of the foam 1545b of FIG. 136 is covered with the conductive covering portion 1545a of FIG. 136 as a conductive member.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back lid in the effect display device 1600, and the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back lid in the effect display device 1600 are conductive. It is electrically connected via the elastic member 1545.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 formed of the conductive member and the metal back cover in the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the metal back lid in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 1545, so that the influence of electromagnetic wave noise on the peripheral control substrate 1510 can be This can be reduced by the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the metal back cover in the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the influence by electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gaming board 5 of FIG. 110, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 110, and the tank rail 553 of FIG. 110 are provided. The game board 5 is provided with the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 of FIG. 110 as a box body to which the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 110 is attached as a substrate box. The ball tank 552 is capable of storing game balls. The tank rail 553 is capable of flowing the gaming balls stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side.

  The effect control unit 1500 as a substrate box is accommodated in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5. The tank rail 553 is formed with a notch 553aa shown in FIG. 110 as a hole through which foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B flowing down can fall. An upper wall 3010 a of the game board 5 is disposed below the tank rail 553 as an upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1. In this pachinko machine 1, the foreign matter falling from the notch 553 aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received at the upper wall 3010 a as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5. .

  As described above, foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed on the tank rail 553 can be received at the top wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, so foreign matter Even if it falls from the notch 553 aa formed in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from entering the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to a foreign object falling to the effect control unit 1500 as a substrate box housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical trouble due to the foreign matter dropped from the tank rail 553.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. It is possible to advance the game based on etc., and equipped with the power supply substrate 630 of FIG. 139 as a power supply means capable of creating various voltages based on the power supply voltage from the game hall as outside the gaming machine There is.

  The power supply substrate 630 is, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 of FIG. 139 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 of FIG. 139 having the same package type (TO-220F). , D10 at least. Of the plurality of parts having the same shape, the silk-printed TSLK 9 in FIG. 142 (b) is a part other than this specific part on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing on the specific part. The elements are silk-printed so that they can be distinguished from the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 of FIG.

  Specifically, as silk printing of FETQ5 which is a specific component, while silk printing TSLK9 of FIG. 142 (b) is silk printed on the mounting surface of power supply substrate 630, other than the specific component is excluded. The components QQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 of FIG. 139 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 of FIG. 139 have silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8 of FIG. It is silk printed. In the silk print TSLK9, a white hatched line ad1 which does not exist in the silk print TSLK1 to TSLK8 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Q5 in FIG. 139 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and so on of FIG. Even if D10 is provided on power supply substrate 630, silk-printed TSLK 9 for a specific part FET Q5 among a plurality of parts having the same shape is FET Q1, Q2, which is another part excluding this specific part. The components QQ, Q2, Q3, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are silk-printed so that the component QQ, which is the component to be noted, can be identified as the other components It becomes possible to distinguish from Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10. There. Therefore, among the plurality of parts, the part to be noted can be identified from other parts.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. It is possible to advance the game based on etc., and as the light emitting means, 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 provided on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b of FIG. 146 and on the left side of FIG. 146 While having huLED1-huLED5 which are five full color LED's provided in decoration board 402a, as a plurality of strip board-like decoration boards formed in predetermined shape, it extended up and down along door frame left side decoration 404 A lower left side decoration substrate 402b and a left side upper decoration substrate 402a which are formed in an elongated strip shape To have. In addition, while having a plurality of full color LEDs as light emitting means, as a plurality of strip-shaped decorative substrates formed in a predetermined shape, an elongated strip extending laterally along the center portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 formed in a shape, the other central decoration substrate (not shown) formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending along the center portion of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top decoration A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending leftward and rightward along the left side portion of the body 453, an elongated strip shape extending leftward and rightward along the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 Another left decorative substrate (not shown) formed on the door frame, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 formed in an elongated strip shape extending right and left along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and a door frame top And a further right decorative board (not shown) is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left and right along the right side of Kazaritai 453. A strip-shaped door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has 11 full-color LEDs, and a strip-shaped other central decorative substrate has 5 full-color LEDs, and a strip-shaped door frame top left The decorative substrate 456 has seven full color LEDs, the strip-like other left decorative substrate has one full color LED, and the strip-like door frame top right decorative substrate 457 has six It has a full color LED, and the strip-like other right decoration substrate has two full color LEDs. Strip-like left side lower decorative substrate 402b, strip-like upper left side decorative substrate 402a, strip-like door frame top central decorative substrate 455, strip-like other central decorative substrate, strip-like door frame Among the top left decoration substrate 456, the other left decoration substrate of band plate shape, the door plate top right decoration substrate 457 of band plate shape, and the other right decoration substrate of band plate shape, as a specific band plate decoration substrate The strip-like left-side lower decoration substrate 402b is an LED provided on the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b of FIG. 146 as a light emission control means capable of performing light emission control to the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting constant current drive circuit 402ba and constant current drive circuit 402bbx constituting LED constant current drive circuit 402bb A band-plate-like door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is a first light emission control means capable of performing light emission control on eleven full color LEDs, and constitutes a first LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. And a second constant current drive circuit constituting a second LED constant current drive circuit, and as a specific band plate shaped decoration substrate, a band plate shaped door frame top left decoration substrate 456 Has a constant current drive circuit constituting one LED constant current drive circuit provided in itself as a light emission control means capable of performing light emission control on seven full color LEDs, and a specific strip plate decoration As a substrate, a strip plate-like door frame top right decoration substrate 457 has one LED constant current drive circuit provided therein as a light emission control means capable of performing light emission control to six full color LEDs. And a constant current driving circuit for forming. Strip-like left side lower decorative substrate 402b, strip-like upper left side decorative substrate 402a, strip-like door frame top central decorative substrate 455, strip-like other central decorative substrate, strip-like door frame Of the top left decorative substrate 456, the other left decorative substrate in the form of a strip, the door frame in the shape of a strip top right decorative substrate 457, and the other right decorative substrate in the form of a strip, a specific decorative plate in the form of a strip As the other strip-shaped decorative substrate other than the above, the strip-like upper left upper decorative substrate 402a is controlled to emit light by the constant current driving circuit 402bbx in the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb provided on the lower left decorative substrate 402b. As another strip-like decorative substrate except for a specific strip-like decorative substrate, the other strip-like central decorative substrate has a second LED element provided on the strip-like door frame top central decorative substrate 455 Second constant current drive circuit in current drive circuit As the other strip-like decorative substrates except for the specific strip-like decorative substrate, the other left decorative substrates in the strip-like shape are used as the strip-like door frame top left decorative substrate 456. As the other strip-like decorative substrate other than the specific strip-like decorative substrate which is controlled to emit light by the constant current drive circuit in the LED constant current drive circuit provided, the other strip-like right decorative substrate is The light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit in the LED constant current drive circuit provided on the plate-like door frame top right decoration substrate 457.

  Constant current drive circuits 402bax and constant current drive circuits 402bbx provided on the strip-like left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and first and second constant current drive circuits provided on the strip-like door frame top central decoration substrate 455; A constant current drive circuit 402bax, as at least one of a constant current drive circuit provided on a strip-like door frame top left decorative substrate 456 and a constant current drive circuit provided on a strip-like door frame top right decorative substrate 457 The constant-current drive circuit 402bbx is formed so that its planar shape is substantially rectangular, and each side is non-parallel along both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the strip-like lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. It is supposed to be deployed. Specifically, the land sides of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx shown in FIG. 148 are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It is arranged as.

  Thus, a strip-like left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a strip-like upper left side decorative substrate 402a, a strip-like door frame top central decorative substrate 455, a strip-like other central decorative substrate, a strip Of the left-handed door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the other left decorative substrate in the form of a band plate, the right-hand decorative substrate 457 in the form of a banded door frame, and the other right decorative substrate in the shape of a band plate The lower left lower side decoration substrate 402b, which is a decoration substrate of the present invention, has a constant current drive circuit 402bax and a constant current drive circuit 402bbx formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax, The respective sides of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are arranged so as to be non-parallel along both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the strip-like lower side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, as compared with the case where the respective sides of constant current drive circuit 402bax and constant current drive circuit 402bbx are arranged in parallel along both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the lower left-side decorative substrate 402b in the shape of a band plate. And a region sandwiched by both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped lower left decorative substrate 402b And a region sandwiched by each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be formed large. Therefore, the wiring is drawn from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx, and Ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 provided on the decorative substrate 402b, and five provided on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a It can be electrically connected to huLED1~huLED5 a Rukara LED. Also, a strip-like left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a strip-like upper left side decorative substrate 402a, a strip-like door frame top central decorative substrate 455, a strip-like other central decorative substrate, a strip-like Of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a strip-like other left decorative substrate, a strip-like door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and a strip-like other right decorative substrate, a particular strip-like decoration A strip-like upper left-handed decorative substrate 402a, which is another strip-like decorative substrate excluding the substrate, is provided with a constant current with the strip-like left-side lower decorative substrate 402b which is a specific strip-like decorative substrate. Even if the light emission control means such as the drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are not provided in itself, the light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx which is the light emission control means provided on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. Can be Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring is drawn out from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx in the strip-like lower side lower decoration substrate 402b.

[13. Another example]
The present invention is not limited to the embodiment described above, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be practiced in various forms within the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the movable effect unit, the rotary decorative body 3126 is provided with a plurality of (four) decorative portions 3127 which are rotatable around an axis extending left and right and different from each other in the circumferential direction. Although the four concentrically illustrated ones are shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rotating decorative body which is rotatable around an axis extending up and down and in which a plurality of decorative parts different from each other in the circumferential direction are formed It may be one having at least one, one having at least one rotary decoration rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, one having at least one movable decoration sliding in the lateral direction, etc. .

  In the embodiment described above, although the clutch mechanism 3250 is used as the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 which are moved up and down through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the present invention is limited thereto Instead, the clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between the drive motor and the movable decorative body moving in the lateral direction, the movable decorative body rotating around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, or the like.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes the storage case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the roller 3254. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and rotation from the drive motor The first sun gear, the first planetary gear, and the rotation connected to the drive motor side. And a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear connected to the first sun gear, a second planet gear, and a rotatable rotary ring gear connected to the first sun gear. Between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, a carrier provided with supporting shafts for supporting the both on both sides is disposed, and the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism And in may be those adapted to be transmitted at a reduced speed rotation from the drive motor to rotate the ring gear provided with a number of teeth difference between at least one gear of the ring gear and the sun gear.

  In the embodiment described above, peripheral control board 1510 is provided with plugs of special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with sockets for special connector SCN3, and liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with sockets for special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged to be able to visually recognize the direction in which information and signals flow. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals may be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals may be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in peripheral data ROM 1520a included in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred from peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to peripheral control substrate 1510, so peripheral data The ROM substrate 1520 is on the transmission side, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 is on the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector serving as a socket) which corresponds to a plug, and in response to this, when the peripheral control substrate 1510 becomes a socket, a special connector (or a plug and Special connector) can be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control substrate 1510 outputs the plurality of video signal systems to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so the peripheral control substrate 1510 is on the transmission side and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is on the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a socket, the special connector (or plug) is produced. Special connector) can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a nonconductive resin and are molded to be transparent. It may be molded in opaque black as a resin, or it may be molded in translucent color if the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 are made of conductive resin. It may be done. Even in this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the peripheral control substrate described above on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) By fixing various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, etc. with metal nabe screws 1510, as described above, the circuit ground can be provided to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. It can be configured. As a result, the noise that has entered from the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 can be made to flow to the grounds (GND) of various substrates as circuit ground, and noise can be removed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. May be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 149 shows a modified example of the dispensing device, and is a cut away rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device provided with the dispensing blade 589 provided with four blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape and provided with the radio wave sensor. FIG. 149 is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing unit corresponding to FIG. 89 described above, taken at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade, and is denoted by the same reference numeral as FIG. When the discharge blade 589 is provided with four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, although not shown in FIG. 149, the above-described discharge gear member 588 has a flat plate-like detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. The four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90 degree region in the circumferential direction of the delivery gear member 588 is taken as the light shielding range at the 45 degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by 18 step rotation which united 9 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 and 9 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 with the region of 45 degrees where the detection piece 588b is not formed as a light receiving range. Thus, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by 18 steps with respect to the payout of one game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission so that the discharge blade 589 integrally rotating with the discharge gear member 588 can rotate 90 degrees. By selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588, the reduction ratio n can be determined.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the payout device 580 is provided with the payout detection sensor 591 attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 to detect the gaming ball B. However, a radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch to detect passage of the game ball B, but the game ball B actually passes when it is affected by radio waves. Nevertheless, it is possible for the game ball B to appear to be in a non-passing state due to a malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the payout motor By performing control to rotate the rotary shaft of 584 excessively, a large amount of gaming balls B will be paid out. In order to detect a fraudulent act (referred to as "radio wave goto") of acquiring the gaming ball B in such a fraudulent manner, as shown in FIG. 149, the radio wave sensor 594 is dispensed near the top of the payout detection sensor 591 Can be provided and configured. When a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is irradiated based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, The emergency stop of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is performed, and the radio wave goto notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave broadcast notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the radio wave goto notification command of 8 bit width from the payout control board 633, the radio wave goto notification command is set from 8 bit width to 16 bit width and the radio wave goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume. While flowing from various speakers, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode that blinks in red) to be shaped into content that can notify a radio wave goto and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio wave broadcast notification command having a width of 16 bits, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "abnormality has occurred." Do.

  In place of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact-type ball passage sensor 594 'may be used, which is a contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switch. A detection signal from the contact ball passage sensor 594 'is input to the payout control substrate 633, and the payout control substrate 633 generates a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the contact ball passage sensor 594'. Based on this, when the number of balls from which the game balls B have been paid out does not match, it can be configured that it can be determined that some injustice has been made. When it is determined that some fraud has been made, the payout control board 633 urgently stops the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584, and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a go notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives an 8-bit wide Goto notification command from the delivery control board 633, the main control board 1310 sets the Goto alert sound to the maximum volume by changing the Goto notification command from 8-bit width to 16 bit width, While flowing, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red) to be shaped as content that can notify a goto and transmitted to the peripheral control substrate 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a Goto notification command having a width of 16 bits, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a large message "abnormality has occurred" on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode. .

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is driven in a step manner, the rotation shaft is stepwise rotated at an angle of 18 degrees as a predetermined angle. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is configured via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, which constitute the rotation transmitting member. The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated at a low speed, and the rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, Alternatively, the speed may be increased and the discharge blade 589 may be rotated via the second transmission gear 587 'and the discharge gear 588a') of the discharge gear member 588. In this way, since the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance so that the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, The positioning position is different every time one ball is taken out. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, whereby the adhesion position of dust and dirt can be dispersed. Of course, if the speed increase ratio of the above-mentioned rotation transmitting member is set to cause such positioning error, although the error is accumulated, the error of the game ball is accumulated each time one ball is paid out The rotational angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light shielding pieces) of the delivery gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the delivery blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance, the rotational position of the payout blade 589 for receiving and sending the gaming ball is changed every time the gaming ball is paid out. By dispersing the position where the dust adheres, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against dust, dirt and the like.

  In the embodiment described above, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state in which shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between cover body 1501 and various substrates by this, a predetermined distance is provided between the front surface of each substrate (surface facing the back surface of cover flat 1501a) and the back surface of cover flat 1501a. A space having a height dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form two spaces. Space is the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) between the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of 540 and a surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 made of metal A second space 1505 b having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in this embodiment) with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large movable effect unit (electrical drive source or drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting an origin position and an operation position) is disposed on the game board 5 in the depth direction If there is room in the distance dimension of the second predetermined dimension, the first predetermined dimension may be the same as the second predetermined dimension, or the second predetermined dimension. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by housing various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise in the first space 1505a, and heat in the second space 1505b. The heat generated from the various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing the various electronic components and the like emitting the light.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 by forming a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az in the shield plate 1540d made of metal. And the type (or management number), the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, part numbers, pin numbers, etc.) can be viewed. Also, the part numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 Part numbers, pin numbers etc.) can be visually recognized, and peripheral data ROM The part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk printed respectively Content (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, but the metal corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, peripheral data ROM 1520a A rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the shield plate 1540d. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the shield plate 1540d made of metal so that the surroundings can also be viewed. . Also, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN 1 provided on peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540d made of metal corresponding to a region larger than the shape formed by the special connector SCN3), or the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate From the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with 1530 can be confirmed. The position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening in.

  In the embodiment described above, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side and right side of the cover flat side of the cover body 1501 A plurality of ventilating holes 1501az may be formed in any one or a combination thereof except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side among 1501e. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be respectively formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a and the left side, lower side and right side . Even with this configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of gaming ball B) falls toward the inside of peripheral control board box 1505 via ventilation hole 1501az. It can be prevented from intruding. As a result, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble caused by foreign matter dropped onto various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical trouble due to the foreign matter dropped from the tank rail 553. As a reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, temporarily forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 via the ventilation holes 1501az. The foreign substance (for example, metal powder produced by the abrasion of the gaming ball B) generated by the gaming ball B falls into and enters the inside of the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the electric substance by the foreign substance dropped onto various substrates It is because the probability that a problem will occur is high.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat side A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side among 1501e. In this case, forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided respectively on the left side, the lower side, and the right side can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. As a reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, temporarily forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side as described above, through the ventilation holes 1501az A foreign substance (for example, metal powder produced by wear of the game ball B) falling toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 falls and enters, thereby dropping the peripheral control board box 1505 to various substrates This is because the possibility of electrical troubles caused by foreign matter is high.

  In the embodiment described above, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated due to the wear of the gaming ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Although it has been described above, one notch, hole or groove may be formed in the same manner as the notch 553aa with respect to the ball passage along which the game ball B rolls. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, as shown in FIG. 94, the metal of the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a A notch, hole or groove through which powder can be removed from the induction passage 570a can be formed on the back surface of the induction unit base 571 of the induction unit 570 shown in FIG. Below the ball guiding unit 570, as shown in FIG. 94, the dispensing device 580, the substrate unit 620, etc. are disposed, and the dispensing device 580 has a substrate etc. on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The substrate unit 620 includes the power supply substrate 630, the payout control substrate 633, the interface substrate 635, etc. shown in FIG. 95, and various substrates are arranged. Therefore, when forming a notch, a hole or a groove on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the game ball falling through the notch, the hole or the groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates disposed below the induction unit 570. Therefore, a bowl-like member can be formed to project rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. And the position of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted, or both can be adopted. Can also be configured. Further, along the upper side of the power supply substrate cover 631 of the power supply substrate 630, the delivery control substrate box 632 of the delivery control substrate 633, the interface substrate cover 636 of the interface substrate 635 shown in FIG. The position of the notched portion, hole or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 can be formed to protrude, and the power supply substrate cover 631, the dispensing control substrate box 632, and the interface substrate cover 636. The position of and can be configured to shift, or both can be adopted and configured.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the power switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power destruction circuit 630g are provided on one power supply substrate 630. Although various electronic components and the like are provided, they can be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply substrate 630 includes the first power supply substrate 630A and the second power supply substrate 630B, and the first power supply substrate 630A and the second power supply substrate 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply substrate 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminals DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuits of the second power supply substrate 630B are the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuits 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , L3, L4, the fuse FUSE 3, and the wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply substrate 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply substrate 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply substrate 630A are connected to the second power supply substrate 630B via the noise reduction circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, it is also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will be. Note that various DC voltages, such as +35 V, +12 V and +5 V DC, created on the second power supply substrate 630B are supplied from the second power supply substrate 630B to each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply substrate 630A. Ru.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22, and the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is FETQ5 via the resistor R25. When the FET Q5 is inputted to the gate terminal of the FET Q5, the FET Q5 is broken by the large current flowing from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent). As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, but may be constituted by a surge absorber or a thermistor. FIG. 150 is a circuit diagram for describing an outline of a modification of the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate. In FIG. 150, components having the same functions as those shown in FIG. 139 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the configuration of the noise reduction circuit 630b shown in FIG. 139, as described above, the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise reduction, the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise reduction, The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are composed of the choke coil L1 and are input to the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. Also, as described above, AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the anode terminals of the diodes D 5 and D 6 as well as to the rectifier circuit 630 c. The signal is output from the cathode terminal and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. Further, in the configuration of the power supply breakdown circuit 630g shown in FIG. 139, as described above, it is composed of the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of noise reduction circuit 630b shown in FIG. 150, common mode noise reduction circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise reduction, normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise reduction, choke In addition to the coil L1, it comprises a surge absorber SA1 constituting a power supply breakdown circuit 630g ', and the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are a common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, a normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, power supply destruction The circuit 630g 'is input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ has a faster reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1 Silicon surge absorber), one end of which is electrically connected to AC24V1 through power switch 630a, and the other end is electrically connected to AC24V2 through power switch 630a. When a circuit voltage exceeding the allowable circuit voltage is input, the circuit is shorted and the short mode state is maintained. The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2.

  The thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. When the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c flows to the thermistor TH1, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises and the current starts to flow as the resistance value decreases. In other words, the current flowing to the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. Using this function, the plug of the power supply wiring is not plugged into the AC 24V power supply outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines on the island facilities of the game hall, and AC 100V that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC 24V that is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. If the power supply outlet is accidentally inserted, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 exceeds the maximum allowable circuit voltage by the time the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, so that the surge absorber SA1 is self-destructed (self failure) and a short circuit occurs. Is maintained in the short mode state. In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned ON, a large current flows in the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 through the surge absorber SA1 in the short mode state in the noise reduction circuit 630b, and the fuse Even if one or both of FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted, only the power supply substrate 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power supply wiring is accidentally inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage, the power supply substrate 630 It is possible to reliably prevent destruction of each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the above.

  As a result, an AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage with which common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 provided in the power supply generation circuit 630f shown in FIG. The GATE terminal and the CGND terminal for supplying a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 do not have to be provided in the power supply generation circuit 630f ′ shown in FIG. 150, so that the circuit configuration of the power supply generation circuit 630f ′ does not become complicated.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines on the island facilities of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC 24V that is the power supply voltage With the surge absorber SA1 inserted into the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'broken, replace the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and connect the plug of the power cord to AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine island facilities. Even if the power outlet is plugged in, the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Therefore, a large current is applied to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 through the surge absorber SA1. Flows and fuses FUSE1, FUS One or both of the two is to be blown again. That is, unless the power supply substrate 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply substrate 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is not destroyed. Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into the AC 24 V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for pachinko island machines, the game can not be started.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 148, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax A configuration in which the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full color LEDs are divided into a group 1 and a group 2 Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is disposed between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can also be applied to an elongated plate-like decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. For example, in addition to the decoration substrates provided in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper back movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300, the display shown in FIG. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 in the delivery unit 2600 can be mentioned.

  In the embodiment described above, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light by supplying constant current to eight full color LEDs, but the invention is not limited to full color LEDs, and white It may be a single color LED such as red, green, yellow, orange, blue and green. A single color LED can also be used. In this case, light emission control of a maximum of 24 single color LEDs can be performed by one LED constant current drive circuit.

  Furthermore, although DC +12 V from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the embodiment described above, the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the provided linear power supply (linear power supply 283xa shown in FIG. 145 and provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a) for lighting the LED within the current tolerance of the linear power supply It may be used as a voltage of For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, a maximum of one single-color LED (for example, When the LED except red LED is electrically connected, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the single color LED, and the single color LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the above-described heat dispersion resistor circuit. In addition, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, When the red LED is electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is connected It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dispersion resistance of the above-described heat dispersion resistance circuit. The decorative substrate configured in this manner can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to a decorative substrate provided to the game board 5.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, DC +12 V from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 of the constant current drive circuit The cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full color LED is connected electrically to one output channel among the LG8 and the LB1 to LB8 through the heat dispersion resistance of the above-described heat dispersion resistance circuit. However, multiple full color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full color LEDs is two to three. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full color LEDs for one output channel, DC +35 V from the power supply substrate 630 is used as a voltage for lighting the LED instead of +12 V DC from the power supply substrate 630. You may The decorative substrate configured in this manner can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to a decorative substrate provided to the game board 5.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door In the state where the frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative substrate is large. The edges of the land pattern are arranged parallel to the upper and lower sides of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, but the door About any one decoration board among the frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, any 2 decoration boards The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. Then, the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 directly controls the light emission by the LED constant current drive circuit provided for itself, in addition to the full color LED provided for itself, another right decoration substrate on which two full color LEDs are mounted. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 may be directly provided by the LED constant current drive circuit provided with itself, for example, the other left decorative substrate on which one full color LED is mounted in addition to the full color LED provided with itself. The light emission may be controlled.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to pachinko machines, and gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as slot machines The present invention can also be applied to a fusion gaming machine (playing a slot game using a gaming ball) in which a gaming machine) or a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused. Here, a slot machine as a reel-type game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  The slot machine 6000 is configured to include a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004 as shown in FIG. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are mutually connected via a hinge not shown. The front door 6002 can be released from the main body 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with the hinge as a rotation center.

  The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a projection projecting forward from the game panel 6006. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020 and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this projection. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the stored payment button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is done. The main control board 1310 is attached and fixed to a not-shown board holder provided in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotary bodies (not shown), a rendering device (not shown), etc. installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window. It is possible to see through. Three variable rotary bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  In these variable rotary bodies, a translucent design band on which plural types of designs (eg, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as design information is attached to each cylindrical skeleton ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotary body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotary body are connected. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, plural kinds of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the display window described above It looks like

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 performs operation control of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of a effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, etc. based on various commands from the main control board 1310 The progress of the effect is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above.

  A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 of the main control board 1310, and variable display of symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  In the integrated gaming machine, the medal insertion slot 6008 becomes the ball insertion slot 6008 ', and a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the ball insertion slot 6008' as gaming media in the main control board 1310, and the operation of the start lever 6014 is performed. The variable display of symbol information is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018 and the right stop button 6020 or the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media to the tray 6026.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... outer frame, 3 ... door frame, 4 ... main body frame, 5 ... game board, 5a ... game area, 558 ... external terminal board, 559 ... frame earth board, 560 ... payout unit, 570 ... ball Induction unit, 580: Dispensing device, 580a: Dispensing passage, 580b: Ball extraction passage, 581: Dispensing device main body, 582 ... Dispensing device rear lid, 583 ... Dispensing device front lid, 584 ... Dispensing motor, 585 ... Drive gear, 586 ... First transmission gear, 587 ... Second transmission gear, 588 ... Dispensing gear member, 588a ... Dispensing gear, 588b ... Detection piece, 589 ... Dispensing blade, 589a ... Blade piece, 589b ... Sphere housing part, 590 ... Blade rotation detection Sensor, 591 ... Payout detection sensor, 592 ... Ball extraction movable piece, 593 ... Ball extraction lever, 600 ... Upper full ball path unit, 610 ... Lower full ball path unit, 630 ... Power supply substrate, 6 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 0a ... Power switch, 630 b ... Noise countermeasure circuit, 630 c ... Rectification circuit, 630 d ... Power factor improvement circuit, 630 e ... Smoothing circuit, 630 f ... Power generation circuit, 630 g ... Power destruction circuit, 633 ... Dispense control board, 1300 ... Main Control unit, 1310: main control board, 1500: effect control unit, 1501: cover body, 1502: base body, 1503: wiring cover body, 1510: peripheral control board, 1520: peripheral data ROM board, 1530: liquid crystal output board, 1540: Shield plate, 1545: conductive elastic member, 1600: effect display device.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine which advances a game based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of strip-shaped decorative substrates having light emitting means and formed in a predetermined shape,
Among the plurality of strip-shaped decorative substrates, a specific strip-shaped decorative substrate is
A light emission control unit capable of performing light emission control on the light emission unit;
Among the plurality of strip-shaped decorative substrates, the other strip-shaped decorative substrates other than the specific strip-shaped decorative substrate are:
Light emission is controlled by the light emission control means provided on the specific band plate-like decorative substrate,
At least one of the light emission control means is
The planar shape is formed into a substantially rectangular shape, and each side thereof is disposed so as not to be parallel along both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the specific band plate-like decorative substrate, and the light emission control means is mounted And each side of the heat transfer portion formed in a substantially rectangular shape smaller than the shape of the light emission control means in the mounting area of the specific strip plate-like decorative substrate to be parallel to each side of the light emission control means And the heat transfer portion is soldered to the light emission control means to diffuse the heat generated by the light emission control means through the heat transfer portion to the entire specific band plate-like decorative substrate. Heat is dissipated, and no electronic component is disposed between the two end sides in the longitudinal direction of the particular strip-like decorative substrate,
A game machine characterized by